You are on page 1of 262

MiCOM

P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN M/Aq6
Version P631 -305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630
P632 -305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630
P633 -305/306/307/308
-404/405/406/407/408/409/410/411/412
-610/611/620/621/622/630
P634 -305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630

Technical Manual

Content P63x/EN M/Ca4 (-610)


P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (-611/620)
P63x/EN AD/Am6 (-621)
P63x/EN AD/An6 (-622)
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 (-630)

Volume 2 of 2
MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/Ak6
(AFSV.12.10110 D)
Version
P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P632 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P633 -306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620
P634 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620

Upgrade Documentation
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Contents
1 Overview 5

2 Operation 13
2.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (LOC) 13
2.2 Serial Interfaces 15
2.3 Configurable Function Keys (F_KEY) 16
2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (INP) 19
2.5 Measured Data Input (MEASI) 20
2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (MAIN) 21
2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF_1 to CBF_4) 37
2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (DEV01 to DEV03)
(P632, P633 only) 50
2.9 Interlocking Logic (ILOCK)
(P632, P633 only) 65
2.10 Single-Pole Commands (CMD_1)
(P632, P633 only) 67
2.11 Single-Pole Signals (SIG_1)
(P632, P633 only) 68

3 Design 70
3.1 Detachable HMI 70

4 User Interface (HMI) 73


4.1 Display and Keypad 73
4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 75
4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)
(P632, P633 only) 77

5 Settings 78
5.1 Parameters 78

6 Information and Control Functions 98


6.1 Operation 98
6.2 Fault and Event Records 106

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-3


With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices
MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing
features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation
listed below.

References
Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 Technical Manual
P632-304-403/404-610 P63x/EN M/Ba4 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
P633-304-404/405/406-610
P634-304-403/404-610

Besides the changes carried out with version -620 this detailed upgrade documentation
also considers changes carried out with version -611 and therefore replaces the
following document:

Released Version Documentation


12.12.2007 P631-306-405/406-611 Upgrade documentation
P632-306-405/406-611 P63x/EN AD/Ab5
P633-306-407/408/409-611 (AFSV.12.09970 D)
P634-306-405/406-611

U-4 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

1 Overview

Version Changes
P631-305-403/404-610-710 Hardware No modifications
P632-305-403/404-610-710 Diagram No modifications
P633-305-404/405/406
-610-710 Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850
systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P634-305-403/404-610-710
Release: 23.06.2006 DIFF Bug fixing:
In versions -606 to -610 inrush signaling from all three measuring
systems was suppressed when harmonic blocking in measuring system
1 was triggered. This was not accompanied by tripping.
Nevertheless there was the possibility of an overreaction (tripping) when
an inrush condition was not recognized by one measuring system with
the operating mode set to "Not phase-selective" and in an other
measuring system the second harmonic component reached a value of
approximately between 70% and 130% of the fundamental.
FT_DA Bug fixing:
The fault data for F T _ D A : F a u l t c u r r . I Y , b p . u . (026 088) were
mistakenly calculated on the basis of current IY,a.
P631-305-403/404-610-711 Hardware No modifications
P632-305-403/404-610-711 Diagram No modifications
P633-305-404/405/406
-610-711 Software This version is not released.
P634-305-403/404-610-711
Release: ---
P631-305-403/404-610-712 Hardware No modifications
P632-305-403/404-610-712 Diagram No modifications
P633-305-404/405/406
-610-712 Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850
systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P634-305-403/404-610-712
Release: 09.10.2006 IEC Bug fixing:
The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after
approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed.
GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server
communications link.
Bug fixing:
If communication was interrupted during control access via the Ethernet
interface using the operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control
access was only possible after a warm restart of the protection and
control unit.
COMM1 The upgraded communications software 3.18 is now implemented.
Various small bugs have been fixed in communication protocols per
IEC 60870-5-101 and MODBUS.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-5


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
P631-305-403/404-610-713 Hardware No modifications
P632-305-403/404-610-713 Diagram No modifications
P633-305-404/405/406
-610-713 Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850
systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P634-305-403/404-610-713
Release: 12.12.2006 MAIN Bug fixing:
The sequence of M A I N : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g (036 000) and
D I F F : T r i p s i g n a l (041 075) have been changed such that starting
always comes first.
P631-305-403/404-610-714 Hardware No modifications
P632-305-403/404-610-714 Diagram No modifications
P633-305-404/405/406
-610-714 Software
P634-305-403/404-610-714 IEC Bug fixing:
Release: 07.02.2007 The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after
approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed.
GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server
communications link.
P631-306-405/406-611 Hardware As an ordering option for the 40TE and 84TE model versions there is
P632-306-405/406-611 now a variant available with a detachable HMI. The detachable HMI is
P633-306-407/408/409-611 always supplied with a case width of 40TE.
P634-306-405/406-611 The detachable HMI provides the following new features:
Release: 15.03.2007 … 6 freely configurable function keys as well as 6 freely configurable
LED indicators (H18 to H23) each situated next to a function key.
… The freely configurable LED indicators (H4 to H16 and H18 to H23)
are provided as multi-color LEDs.
P631-307-405/406-611
Note:
P632-307-405/406-611
When the local control panel is ordered together with a detachable HMI
P633-307-407/408/409-611
for version -306, it is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED
P634-307-405/406-611 indicators fitted. Otherwise the earlier local control panel is delivered
Release: 05.11.2007 without having function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted.
With version -307 and irrelevant of the ordering option, the local control
panel is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED
indicators fitted.
Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces to connect
the detachable HMI.
… P631.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P631.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P632.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P632.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P633.407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P633.408 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P633.409 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P634.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P634.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

U-6 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
Software
LOC Because of the ordering option "detachable HMI" this additional Device
Identification parameter is now available:
L O C : L o c a l H M I exists (221 099).
LOC Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned
MAIN to all default reset functions. These binary input functions are now
available in the configuration list for the two newly implemented group
resetting functions as well as the extended functional assignment for the
CLEAR key ('C'):
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 (005 248)
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 (005 249)
LOC: Assignment reset key (005 251)

Two menu jump lists may now be configured. These menu jump lists
make it possible to select individual menu points (i.e. set values,
counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely definable sequence.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 (030 238)
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 (030 239)
IEC Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to
logged-on clients with the parameter
I E C : T C P k e e p - a l i v e t i m e r ( 1 0 4 0 6 2 ) . This active
monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring using parameter
IEC: Inactivity timer (104 050).
Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time,
activated by parameter I E C : S w i t c h . d a y l . s a v . t i m e (104 219).
Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are
governed by the following settings:
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start (104 220)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d (104 221)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m (104 222)
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + (104 223)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end (104 225)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d (104 226)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m (104 227)
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ (104 228)
A second SNTP server may now be applied for time synchronization.
Should no answer be transmitted by the first SNTP server the next
request is automatically transferred to the second SNTP server (backup
function).
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP (104 202)
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP (104 210)
Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish
a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network,
now only the setting of the gateway address is required via
I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s (104 011).
Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-7


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
LED The new detachable HMI provides the following extended display
functionalities:
… The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the
operating mode LED flashing.
… Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable
LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or
green light. If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color
will be 'amber' (yellow).
Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently
configured LED indicators H1 and H17 are now displayed via
configuration parameters and physical state signals.
F_KEY The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys
operated either as a key or switch with or without password protection.
CBF_1 Implementation of the new circuit breaker failure protection function
... CBF_3 including a current reset criterion. Depending on the number of ends on
the protected object there are up to 4 function groups available.
P631-306/307-405/406 Hardware No modifications
-611-715
Diagram No modifications
P632-306/307-405/406
-611-715 Software
P633-306/307-407/408/409 LOC Bug fixing:
-611-715 Reset functions configured to the CLEAR key ('C') are now carried out
P634-306/307-405/406 correctly.
-611-715 A system restart could previously occur when the detachable HMI was
Release: 12.06.2007 disconnected.
FT_DA Bug fixing:
The fault data for differential current and restraining current issued by the
ground differential protection functions REF_2 and REF_3 are now also
calculated correctly when the operating mode is set to
"Low imped. / IP,max" (previously they had twice the value).
REF_1 When the differential protection is triggered these functions are now
...REF_3 blocked as long as at least one of the following conditions is met:
D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 1 t r i g g . (041 124)
D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 2 t r i g g . (041 125)
D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 3 t r i g g . (041 126)
CBF_1 Timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' of functions CBF_2…CBF_4 are now
... CBF_3 processed regardless of the setting at CBF_1.
IEC The ICD files have been modified. urcbMX has been added to the logical
nodes PhsPDIF1, Rf1PDIF1, Rf2PDIF1 and Rf3PDIF2.
Implementation of the communication protocol IEC 61850 in these
versions is KEMA certified.

U-8 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
P631-306-405/406-611-716 Hardware No modifications
P632-306-405/406-611-716
Diagram No modifications
P633-306-407/408/409
-611-716 Software
P634-306-405/406-611-716 IEC The data model of the measured operating values for differential current
Release: 31.08.2007 and restraining current in the functions DIFF and REF_n is now
implemented according to the data attributes for the standard WYE, ACT
and ACD classes.
Note:
With this implementation, the "phase" measured values from the DIFF
protection functions correspond to the measured values of the three
measuring systems:
"phSA" = Measuring system 1
"phSB" = Measuring system 2
"phSC" = Measuring system 3
Accordingly the measured values from the REF_n protection functions
are modeled as "neut".
ICD and PICS-MICS-ADL files have been upgraded accordingly.
P631-308-407/408-620 Hardware The binary I/O module X (4H) with four high-break contacts is now
P632-308-407/408-620 available.
P633-308-410/411/412-620 With the P632/P633, the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO) for the control of
P634-308-407/408-620 up to three switchgear units is available as an additional option.
Release: 06.06.2008 Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the new binary I/O
module X (4H) and the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO).
… P631 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P631 -408 (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P632 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P632 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P633 -410 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P633 -411 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P633 -412 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
… P634 -407 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
… P634 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
DVICE The previous parameter
DVICE: Order No. (000 001)
has been renamed to
DVICE: AFS Order No. (001 000).

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-9


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
LOC The previous parameters
LOC: Assignment reset key (005 251) and
LOC: Assignment read key (080 110)
have been renamed to
LOC: Fct. reset key (005 251) and
LOC: Fct. read key (080 110)
without any changes in their functionality.
Now the selection offered for the parameter
L O C : L a n g u a g e (003 020)
no longer is between, e.g. German, and English but between Regional
language and Reference language. (This will not cause any changes in
functionality as the Reference language is US English and the Regional
language will depend on the language order option.)
IEC The menu point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) is now
available when the communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is set.
GOOSE P632, P633 only: Several GOOSE signals have been added as part of
the new control functionality. For a detailed listing see sections "Settings
/ Configuration Parameters" and "Information and Control Functions /
Logic State Signals".

U-10 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
MAIN The following menu points are now available for each parameter subset:
MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx
MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx
MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx
MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx
The following menu point has been renamed:
MAIN: Device on-line
(previously: M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d )
The following parameters are now available for status signals from
external devices (CBx = CB1 to CB4):
MAIN: Sig. asg. CBx open
MAIN: Sig. asg. CBx closed
Note:
These signal assignment parameters are visible for 4 circuit breakers
with P631, P632, P633 and P634. However, they can only be used with
the P632 and P633 and only in accordance with the number of CBs
supported.
In order to configure function keys with control functions the P632 and
P633 have the following parameters available which may be assigned to
four of the six function keys:
MAIN: Device selection key (006 001)
MAIN: Device OPEN key (006 002)
MAIN: Device CLOSE key (006 003)
MAIN: Local/Remote key (006 004)
The P632 and P633 now feature the acquisition of debounced binary
signals for control functions, and the parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g .
As part of the control functionality the P632 and P633 now feature
additional parameters.
MAIN: Type of bay (220 001)
MAIN: Customized bay type (221 062)
MEASI The result of the temperature measurement may now be also read out as
the maximum value since the last reset operation (temperature Tmax).
INP The setting I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) is now available for conformity with
standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A.
FT_DA Correction: The wrong internal timing where the parameter
FT_DA: Run time to meas. (004 199)
could take on the value 'Overflow' has been corrected.
THRM1, Correction: With the following menu points the step size for temperature
THRM2 values has be reduced from 0.01 to 0.001.
THRM1: Object temp. p.u. 1 (004 205)
THRM2: Object temp. p.u. 2 (004 208)
THRM1: Coolant temp. p.u. 1 (004 206)
THRM2: Coolant temp. p.u. 2 (004 209)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-11


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes
CBF_x The previous parameter
CBF_1: Function group CBF (056 007)
has been renamed to
CBF_1: Function group CBF_1 (056 007)
without any changes in the functionality.
The following parameters may now not only be set to an explicit time
value but also to 'Blocked'.
CBF_2: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 227)
CBF_3: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 240)
CBF_4: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 254)
The startup criterion has been modified. After a CBF startup the state of
the general trip signal or the external trigger signal are now no longer
considered. The CBF will then only reset if the current criterion is met
(current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or the CB state is
open.
DEV01 to New function groups "External Devices xx" (xx = 01, 02, 03) as part of
DEV03 the implementation of control functions.
(P632,
P633 only)
ILOCK New function group "Interlocking Logic" as part of the implementation of
(P632, control functions.
P633 only)
CMD_1 New function group "Single Pole Commands" as part of the
(P632, implementation of control functions.
P633 only)
SIG_1 New function group "Single Pole Signals" as part of the implementation
(P632, of control functions.
P633 only)

U-12 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2 Operation

2.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)

Function keys on the front


panel user interface (HMI)
The new detachable HMI (as of version -611) provides 6 freely configurable function
keys. Either a single function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two
menu jump lists may be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting
parameter F _ K e y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2 Function key F1
is only enabled after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d
f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function
key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s .
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is
valid for function keys F2 to F6.

Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section
'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting
Mechanisms' as well as in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)'
and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely
configurable, such as the other 12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration
of the function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission).

Selection of the control


point (P632, P633)
As of version -620 the function keys available on the units P632 and P633 can also be
configured as control keys (e.g. Local/Remote, Device Selection, Device OPEN, Device
CLOSE). See figure U-1 and section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly
as control keys (P632, P633 only)'. Therefore new settings have been added to function
group HMI.

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between
local and remote control is achieved using either an appropriately configured function
key or an external key switch. The position of this switch is checked via an appropriately
configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w . )

For further information on the application of a function key to switch the control point
from 'Local' to 'Remote' refer to sections 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group
F_KEY)' and 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

The setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the control point


is switched (using either the L/R key or the key switch) from 'Local' to 'Remote' control
(L↔R) or from 'Local+Remote' to 'Local' control (R&L↔L) and back again.

If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local
control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-13


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

F_KEY: Fct. LOC: Fct. assign.


assignm. F1 L/R key
[ 080 112 ] [ 225 208 ]

1
2

1: R <-> L
Local/Remote key 2: R & L <-> L
[006 004]

1)
F1 S1 1 ≥1 1 ≥1
& &
R1 0 & ≥1 2,3 LOC: Rem.acc.block.
active
& [ 221 004 ]
&
Local 1 LOC: Loc.acc.block.
& active
Remote 2 [ 221 005 ]
& LOC: Local &
Local & Remote 3 Remote Control
305 560

MAIN: Inp.asg.
L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3

Signal n

Without function
Selected signal
1

1) Key of the local


control panel 12Z6261 A_EN

U-1 Selection of the control point


(The same applies to the other function keys F2 to F6.)

Configuration of the
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from
the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by
repeated pressing of the "READ" key.

Configuration of the
CLEAR key ('C')
Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may
be selected from a list at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y . These are carried out by pressing
the "CLEAR" C key.

U-14 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.2 Serial interfaces

2.2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850


(Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)

2.2.1.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

Control of switchgear units


(P632, P633)
Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P63x can be carried out from all
clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is
executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the
execution of such a command are rejected. To have clients control switchgear units
(external devices) the following operating modes can be set at I E C : D E V c o n t r o l
model:
… Control service mode
… Direct control with enhanced security
… SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by
the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the
switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are
rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P63x resets
this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.
The switchgear units’ contact positions signalled to the clients are made with the Report
Control Blocks of the switchgear units.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-15


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.3 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)

The P63x includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable.
Function keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at
F_Key: Password funct. keyx.

As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2. After the
password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at
F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the
password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a
function key is configured as a control key a password request is only issued when the
command "Local/Remote switching" has been assigned to this function key.

Configuration of function
keys with a single function
Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state
signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception:
L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing
the respective function key on the P63x.

Configuration of the
function keys with a group
resetting function
Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default
reset functions. Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two
group resetting functions assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by
selecting the listing at M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x E X T (x: 1 or 2).
By pressing the assigned function key all (up to 10) reset actions selected at
M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x (x: 1 or 2) are triggered.

Configuration of function
keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists
assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at
L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu
jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key.

Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).


Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be
selected.

Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective
function key configuration.

U-16 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Configuration of function
keys as control keys
(P632, P633 only)
Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the listings at
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

• MAIN: Local/Remote key


• MAIN: Device selection key
• MAIN: Device OPEN key
• MAIN: Device CLOSE key

These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above commands
have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function keys.

Operating mode of the


function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected at
F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether
the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode 'Key' the
selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode
'Switch' the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.

Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is irrelevant
and it is therefore ignored.

Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a
function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered
when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-17


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-2 Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.

U-18 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)

Filter function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference
peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low",
Filt.'). With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only
signalled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of
sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set
at parameter I N P : F i l t e r .

INP: Fct.assignm.
Uxx
[ XXX XXX ]

Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT

Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT

Meas. Function & Function enabled

INP: Mode U xxx


[ YYY XXX ]

1
2

3
0: active "Low"
1: active "High"
2: active "Low", filt.
3: active "High",filt.
-Uxxx

&
Input signal
&

INP: Filter &


[ 010 220 ]
&

INP: Control
& U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]

&

12Z6213 A_EN

U-3 Configuration and operating mode of binary signal inputs


(This diagram replaces figure 3-18 in the technical manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-19


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.5 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

2.5.1 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct measured
value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T), but also as the
maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax).

For this the following menu points are available:

MEASI: Temperature Tmax (maximum temperature value)


MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT (reset via a binary signal)
MEASI: Reset Tmax USER (manual reset)

MEASI: Enabled
[ 035 008 ] C

+
MEASI: PT100
faulty
- [ 040 190 ]
PT 100 Analog input

CHECK: PT100 open


circuit
[ 098 024 ]

MEASI: Temperature
[ 004 133 ]

MEASI: Temperature
p.u
[ 004 221 ]

MEASI: Temperature
Tmax
[ 004 233 ]

64Z70H3A_EN

U-4 Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer


(This diagram replaces figure 3-24 in the technical manual for version -610)

U-20 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

2.6.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control - (P632, P633 only)

In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time
tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these
signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for each of these groups the
debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters
achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.

SIG_1: Gr.Asg.
Debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]

1
MAIN: Debounce
2 Time Gr. 1
[ 221 200 ]
3
MAIN: Chatt.Mon.
Time Gr.1
1: Group 1 [ 221 201 ]
2: Group 2
MAIN: Change of
State Gr.1
3: Group 3 [ 221 202 ]
SIG_1: Signal
S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]

SIG_1: Debounced
sig. S001
Debouncing & Chatter 310 044
DEV01: Closed suppression
Signal EXT DEV01: Debounced
[ 210 031 ] Group 1 cl.signal
310 045
DEV01: Open
Signal EXT DEV01: Debounced
[ 210 030 ] tr.signal
310 046

DEV01: Gr.
Assign. Debounc.
[ 210 011 ]

1
2

1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
64Z7034A_UK

U-5 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-21


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer
stage.

If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing the
time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be
generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value
'After debounce time'.

After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the
same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.

Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has
elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the
value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in
the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value
'1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the
operating data memory.

U-6 Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge
(e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem Unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem Sorted'.)
Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms
s: start
e: end

U-22 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.2 Selection of the Bay Type - (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The Bay type defines the
layout of a bay with its switchgear units.

The P63x offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type be
missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P63x to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P63x.
By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also
define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at
MAIN: Customized bay type.

Once the user has selected a bay type, the P63x can automatically configure the binary
inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the
List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

MAIN: Type of Bay


[ 220 001 ]

MAIN: Auto-
Assignment I/O
[ 221 065 ]

BB1

Q0

MAIN: DEVxx is a
C.B.
306 044
MAIN: Customized
Bay Type
[ 221 062 ]

12Z51AQB_UK

U-7 Selection of the bay type

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-23


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.3 Function Blocks - (P632, P633 only)

By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be
prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external
signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device.

Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output


signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1
and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts
a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . x a c t i v e
is issued.

U-8 Function blocks

U-24 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.4 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals -


(P632, P633 only)

Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents
the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the "Closed" position
signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d (x = 1 to 4). In the
same way coupling between control and protection for the "Open" position signal is
made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n (x = 1 to 4). As a result, the
CB status signal needs to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is
implemented.

Note:
With all unit versions, P631 to P634, these signal assignments are visible for four circuit
breakers, but can only be used with P632 and P633 according to the number of
supported CBs.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-25


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Sig. Asg.


CB1 Closed
[ * ]
DEV01: Closed
Signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]

DEV02: Closed
Signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
DEV03: Closed
Signal EXT
[ 210 131 ]

MAIN: CBx Closed


Selected signal 3p EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: CBx Closed
3p EXT
[ * ]

x: 1 x: 2 x: 3 x: 4

MAIN: Sig. Asg. 021 020 021 060 021 062 021 064
CB1 Closed

MAIN: CBx Closed 036 051 036 230 036 231 036 232
3p EXT
64Z7032 A_UK

U-9 Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal

MAIN: Sig. Asg.


CBx Open
[ * ]
DEV01: Open Signal
EXT
[ 210 030 ]

DEV02: Open Signal


EXT
[ 210 080 ]
DEV03: Open Signal
EXT
[ 210 130 ]

MAIN: CBx Open 3p


Selected signal EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: CBx Open 3p
EXT
[ * ]

x: 1 x: 2 x: 3 x: 4

MAIN: Sig. Asg. 021 017 021 061 021 063 021 065
CBx Open

MAIN: CBx Open 031 028 031 046 031 047 031 048
3p EXT
64Z7035 A_UK

U-10 Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal

U-26 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.5 Multiple Signals - (P632, P633 only)

The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR
operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is
defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding
multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored
signal is reset by the following actions:

… General reset
… Latching reset
… The LED indicators have been reset.
… A command received through the communication interface.

If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow
the updated signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-27


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n
MAIN: Mult.
Selected signal sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN: Mult.
sig. 1 stored
S1 1 [ 221 054 ]
MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1

Selected signal MAIN: Mult.


sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]

COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 1 MAIN: Mult.
[ --- --- ] sig. 2 stored
S1 1 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latching
402 102

MAIN: Reset LED


306 020

12Z62FMA_EN

U-11 Multiple signals

U-28 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.6 CB Trip Signal - (P632, P633 only)

The signal M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met


simultaneously:

… The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of ' 1 ' or the
selected trip command from the P63x is present.
… At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of ' 1 ' is present.

The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two
binary signal inputs need to be configured as 'CB trip enable ext.' and as 'CB trip ext.'.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-29


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.Assign.
Tripping
[ 221 010 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
Signal 3

Signal n

Selected signal

MAIN: Prot.Trip>CB
MAIN: Gen. Trip Tripped
Command 1 [ 221 012 ]
[ 036 071 ]
0

1
MAIN: Gen. Trip
Command 2 2
[ 036 022 ]
3

0 3
0: Disabled
1: Gen. Trip Command 1
2: Gen. Trip Command 2
3: Gen. Trip Command 1/2

MAIN: Inp. Asg. CB


Trip
[ 221 013 ]
DEV01: Switch.
Device Open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV02: Switch.
Device Open
[ 210 086 ]
DEV03: Switch.
Device Open
[ 210 136 ]
Selected signal

MAIN: Inp.Asg.CB
Tr.En.Ext
[ 221 050 ]

MAIN: CB Tripped
Selected signal [ 221 016 ]

MAIN: Inp.Asg. CB
Trip Ext
[ 021 024 ]

Selected signal

64Z7033 A_UK

U-12 CB trip signal

U-30 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.7 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions -


(P632, P633 only)

Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the
P63x, the P63x first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch
command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the
interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic
for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each
control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock
equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station
interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units
within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each
switching unit and each control direction (see section ‘Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units').

If “Local” has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be
cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-31


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-13 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks

U-32 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-14 Rejection of switching commands

2.6.8 Communication Error - (P632, P633 only)

If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal
'Communication error' will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication
module A is not fitted.

U-15 Communication error

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-33


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.9 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following resetting actions (as of version -611) are available:

… Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the
displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the
fault memory.
… Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel
LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel user interface
(HMI). By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further
memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is
pressed.
… Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in
section 'Reset'.)
… Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 .)
… Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point M A I N : G r o u p
r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant memories (i.e.
those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .
… Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
… General resetting by setting parameters (menu point M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.

… General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.


(M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.

Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.

In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

U-34 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.

… Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is


assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
… Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t
l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition (L O C : F c t . F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the
selected menu jump list.
… The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for
a resetting action through L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y .

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]

1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute

MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]

0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]

12Z6115 A_EN

U-16 General reset, resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD
(This diagram replaces figure 3-60 in the operating manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-35


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.


active ≥1 EXT
310 024 & [ 005 213 ]

LOC: Fct. reset


key
[ 005 251 ]

m out of n

OP_RC: Reset record.


EXT [005 213]

MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]

0
1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]

MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]

m out of n

x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.


reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249

12Z61RMB_EN

U-17 "CLEAR" key on the front panel HMI and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the reset
signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T ); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
− [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
− [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
− [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
− [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
− [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
− [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT
− [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
− [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT
− [035 182] V/f: Reset replica EXT
− [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT
− [039 122] THRM1: Reset replica EXT
− [036 158] CTS: Reset latching EXT
− [039 182] THRM2: Reset replica EXT
− [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
− [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
− [065 001] MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT

U-36 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 to CBF_4)

As of version P63x -611 the new version of the circuit breaker failure protection function,
identical with all Px3x protection devices, has been implemented. Depending on the
design version this function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function
may be applied to each end on the protected object.

P631: CBF_1 and CBF_2


P632: CBF_1 and CBF_2
P633: CBF_1 to CBF_3
P634: CBF_1 to CBF_4

The following specifications apply to assigning these 4 functions to the physical


measured current values and the internal logical signals.

Assigning ends
The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected using
setting parameters:

Address Description Range of Values Units

022.156 CBF_1 Select. meas. input End a


End b
022.157 CBF_2 Select. meas. input End c
End d
022.158 CBF_3 Select. meas. input
Current summation
022.162 CBF_4 Select. meas. input

Assigning CBs
Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers CBx.
This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the MAIN
function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the assignment of
circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.

Assigning the trip


command
Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective CBF
function may be selected by setting parameter:

Address Description Range of Values Units

022.202 CBF_1 Fct.assign. starting MAIN Gen. trip signal 1


MAIN Gen. trip signal 2
022.216 CBF_2 Fct.assign. starting MAIN Gen. trip signal 3
MAIN Gen. trip signal 4
022.230 CBF_3 Fct.assign. starting
022.244 CBF_4 Fct.assign. starting

The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection function
CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4
provide the same functional range.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-37


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

However, after release of the device software version -611 the following dependencies
between functions have been identified:

The following limitation in setting timer stages (bug fixed as of version -620) is present in
software versions -611 and -611-71x:

In function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 the parameter "Delay/fault beh. CB" (addresses
022 227, 022 240 and 022 254) cannot be set to 'Blocked'. It is not possible to
completely switch off this sub-function. This does not cause a problem regarding
protection functionality as, firstly, the same effect is achieved by setting a timer stage
with a delay time of 100 s and, secondly, the signal "Fault behind CB" may be ignored by
not using it.

Only with version -611 the following links exist for timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' (bug fixed
as of version -611-716):
… Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 3 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 4 : t 1 3 p are
processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p is set to 'Blocked'.
… Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 2 ; C B F _ 3 : t 2 ; C B F _ 4 : t 2 are processed as
'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 2 is set to 'Blocked' .
… If these timer stages in CBF_1 are not set to 'Blocked' the timer stages in CBF_2 to
CBF_4 will be processed as set. If 'Blocked' has been selected for this setting then a
delay time of 655.35 s will become effective.
Note:
In the default setting, these timer stages are not set to 'Blocked' so that the above links
will have no effect. However, should a timer stage in CBF_1 be set to 'Blocked' and
should this function later be disabled and de-configured, then the setting 'Blocked' will
remain effective as described above.

U-38 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Disabling or enabling the


CBF function
The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .
If this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The front panel
HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If only the function
C B F _ 1 : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled
by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the
parameter C B F _ 1 : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input, then
a signal at this input will have no effect.

CBF_1: General
enable USER
[ 022 080 ]

0
CBF_1: General
1 enable .
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes

INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]

U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx

Address 038 041


Address 038 042
CBF_1: Ext./user
enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF_1: Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF_1: Enable
USER
[ 003 016 ]

0
1

0: Don't execute
1: Execute
CBF_1: Disable
EXT
[ 038 042 ]

CBF_1: Disable
USER
[ 003 015 ]

0
1

0: Don't execute
1: Execute

64Z1101 A_EN

U-18 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-39


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Readiness of circuit
breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following
conditions be met:

… The CBF function is not activated.


… Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
… All CBF timer stages have been set to 'Blocked'.

CBF_1: Not Ready


[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1: Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
& CBF_1: Ready
[ 038 009 ]
CBF_1: Blocking
EXT
[ 038 058 ]

CBF_1: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
Blocked &

CBF_1: t2
[ 022 166 ]
Blocked

CBF_1: Delay/
Starting Trig.
[ 022 155 ]
Blocked

CBF_1: Delay/Fault
Beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
Blocked
CBF_1: Delay/CB
Sync.Superv
[ 022 172 ]
Blocked
64Z1102 B_UK

U-19 CBF readiness

U-40 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Detecting a CB tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.

Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow
(e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
for evaluation.

Current flow monitoring


This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole
selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values from the
selected end with the set threshold value C B F : I < .
As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t
f l o w A , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple
signal C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x will be continuously issued.

CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1: Current Flow
IA A
[ 038 230 ]
CBF_1: Current Flow
IB B
[ 038 231 ]
IC CBF_1: Current Flow
C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF_1: Current Flow
>1 Phx
[ 038 233 ]

64Z1103 B_UK

U-20 Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-41


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Evaluation of CB status
signals
Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals provided by
the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the
parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x .

Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.


The P63x can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:
… The 'Open' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T
… The 'Closed' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T
Note: Each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective CBF_x
functions. P631+P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3; P634: x = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the respective
binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P63x
issuing the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria is not
affected by this blocking.

If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P63x.

As an alternative the status signals from the external device (as of version -620) may be
used by the P632 and P633. (See section 2.6.4 'Coupling between control and
protection for the CB signals'.) Assigning necessary for this is carried out with the
parameters M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n or M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d .
Status signals from external devices are processed similar to CB status signals
M A I N : C B x o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T .
(P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3.)

U-42 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

INP: Fct. U xxx


Assign
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx

Address 031 028 &


Address 036 051 CBF_x: CB Pos.
& Implausible
[ * ]
MAIN: CBx Open 3p
EXT &
[ * ]
MAIN: CBx Closed
3p EXT
[ * ]
&

x: 1 x: 2 x: 3 x: 4

MAIN: CBx Open 031 028 031 046 031 047 031 048
3p EXT

MAIN: CBx Closed 036 051 036 230 036 231 036 232
3p EXT

CBF_x: CB Pos. 038 210 043 086 043 116 043 146
Implausible

64Z7031 B_UK

U-21 Plausibility check of CB status signals

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-43


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Startup criteria
The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:

… Internal startup criterion:


Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by setting
parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n . s t a r t i n g , is considered a startup criterion.
In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F _ 1 : S t a r t w i t h
m a n . t r i p , that a manual trip signal will also be used as a startup criterion.
… External startup criterion:
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F _ 1 : S t a r t 3 p E X T )
may be used as a startup criterion.
To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by
applying the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T .
In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion.
The CB auxiliary contacts are only evaluated when no current flow is registered and the
respective trip signal, included in the general trip command, has been selected from the
protection function in parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation
of the CB auxiliary contacts.

Note:
With the implementation of software version -611 the startup criterion could disappear
when the assigned general trip signal or the external startup criterion dropped out. This
happened independently of current flow criteria and CB status signal criteria. The
startup criterion has been modified as of software version -620. After a CBF startup has
occurred the status of the general trip signal or the external startup signal are now no
longer considered. Therefore CBF will drop out only when the current criterion (current
flow is below I< in all three phases) is met or when the CB status is identified as open.

Timers and tripping logic


Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.

… The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still


present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p , has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
… The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still
present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 2 , has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or
protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.

Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF6
circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without
waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB_ 1 fault the
elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input
appropriately configured at C B F _ 1 : C B f a u l t y E X T .

U-44 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Fct.
Assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: CB Pos.
Implausible
[ 038 210 ]

CBF_1: I< >1 &


[ 022 160 ]
&

IA >1 & S 1 1
IB R 1

IC

MAIN: CB1 Closed


3p
[ 031 042 ]

CBF_1: Start with


Man.Trip
[ 022 154 ]

0 >1 & >1 CBF_1: Startup 3p


[ 038 211 ]
1
0: No >1 &
1: Yes

INP: Fct.Assign.
Starting
[ 022 202 ]

Gen Trip Signal 1


Gen Trip Signal 2
Gen Trip Signal 3
Gen Trip Signal 4
& >1
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 3
[ 036 108 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 4
[ 036 109 ]

&
MAIN: Trip Cmd. & >1
Blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Man. Aus
Signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP: Fct. U xxx
Assign
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03 & >1
U xnn

Address 038 209 &


CBF_1: Start Enable
EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 206 ]
64Z1104 B_UK

U-22 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -611

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-45


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Fct.
Assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: CB Pos.
Implausible
[ 038 210 ]

CBF_1: I< &


[ 022 160 ] &
IA & & S 1 1
IB R 1
IC

MAIN: CB1 Open


3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 Closed
3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]

CBF_1: Start with


Man.Trip CBF_1: Startup 3p
[ 022 154 ] & S 1 1 [ 038 211 ]
0 R 1

1 &

0: No
1: Yes

CBF_1: Fct.
Assign. Starting
[ 022 202 ]

Gen Trip Signal 1


Gen Trip Signal 2
Gen Trip Signal 3
Gen Trip Signal 4
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 3
[ 036 108 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip
Signal 4
[ 036 109 ]
&
MAIN: Trip Cmd. &
Blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Manual Trip
Signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP: Fct. U xxx
Assign
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03 &
U xnn

Address 038 209 &


CBF_1: Start
Enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 206 ]
64Z1104 C_UK

U-23 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -620

U-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Not Ready CBF_1: t1 3p


[ 040 025 ] C
[ 022 165 ]

CBF_1: Startup 3p t 0 CBF_1: Trip Signal t1


[ 038 211 ] [ 038 215 ]

CBF_1: t2
C
[ 022 166 ]

t 0 CBF_1: Trip Signal t2


[ 038 219 ]

CBF_1: CB Failure
& [ 036 017 ]
CBF_1: CB Faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]

64Z1105 B_UK

U-24 Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection

Trip commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the
user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.

By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued by the CB
failure protection, will operate in latching mode.
The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by
operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

CBF_1: Min.Dur.
Trip Cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN: Trip Cmd. CBF_1: Trip Command t1
Blocked t 0 >1
[ 021 013 ] & [ 038 220 ]

CBF_1: Trip Signal t1 >1


[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1: Latching
Trip Cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]

0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF_1: Min.Dur.
0: No Trip Cmd.t2
1: Yes [ 022 168 ]

& t 0 >1 CBF_1: Trip Command t2


[ 038 224 ]
CBF_1: Trip Signal t2 >1
[ 038 219 ]

CBF_1: Latching
Trip Cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]

0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Latch. Trip c
Reset
[ 040 139 ]
64Z1106 B_UK

U-25 Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-47


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Starting trigger
Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection function.
In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a condition so as to
guarantee increased security against overreaction.

The signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g


t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting is present. The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after
timer stage C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.

CBF_1: Delay/
Starting Trig.
[ 022 155 ]

MAIN: General Start CBF_1: Trip Signal


[ 036 000 ] & t 0 [ 040 026 ]

CBF_1: Starting CBF_1: Starting


Trig. EXT [ 038 021 ]
[ 038 016 ]

64Z1107 B_UK

U-26 Starting trigger

Fault behind CB protection


A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker
already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.

Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the
circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after
the time delay set at C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.

When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F _ 1 : F a u l t b e h i n d C B


is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM
teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit
breaker failure function.

CBF_1: CB Pos.
Implausible CBF_1: Delay/
[ 038 210 ] Fault Beh. CB
CBF_1: I< [ 022 171 ]

[ 022 160 ] CBF_1: Fault behind


& t 0 CB
[ 038 225 ]
IA &
IB
IC

MAIN: CB1 Open 3p


EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 Closed
3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
64Z1108 C_UK

U-27 Fault behind CB protection

U-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CB synchronization
supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts
are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of
CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the
time delay C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / C B s y n c . s u p e r v can be used. When this time delay
has elapsed the signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p S i g C B s y n c . s u p e r is issued. Poles that
are recognized as being 'open' will still be signaled.

CBF_1: CB Pos.
Implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB1 Open
3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
CBF_1: Delay/
MAIN: CB1 Closed CB Sync.Superv
3p EXT [ 022 172 ]
[ 036 051 ]
CBF_1: I< CBF_1: TripSig
& t 0 CBsync.Super
[ 022 160 ] [ 038 226 ]

IA &
IB
IC

<3

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv
& A Open
[ 038 227 ]

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv
& B Open
[ 038 228 ]

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv
& C Open
[ 038 229 ]

64Z1109 C_UK

U-28 CB synchronization supervision

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-49


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units


(Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) – (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The Bay Panel defines the
layout of a bay with its switchgear units.

Defining a bay type


With the selection of a Bay type, the following definitions are made:

… Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.


… Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P63x.
… The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open' / 'Close' command control of the
switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.
When a Bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the
output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this
configuration. The list of Bay types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and
output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in
the case of automatic configuration.

Setting options for the P63x and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit
into the functional sequence of the P63x (processing of status signals only or controlling
and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example.
Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in
the function diagrams by function group "C O M M 1 :" with a blank address [--- ---], it will
indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been
assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as ‘signal 1’ to ‘signal n’
are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.

U-50 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.1 Processing Status Signals from a Manually Operated Switchgear Unit


(P632, P633 only)

The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals
conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section ‘Main Functions of the
P63x’) are used for further processing. If no logic value of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration
of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear
unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate
position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status


will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position.
Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated
status is signaled.

The signal 'Faulty Pos.' is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached
either their 'Open' or 'Closed' position after the set time delay for running time monitoring
and the delay time set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have elapsed.
If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started.
Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state
actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-51


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-29 Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit

U-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units – (P632, P633 only)

Local or remote control of


external devices
Usually, remote control of external devices is carried out via the communication interface
and local control via appropriately configured function keys on the front panel HMI.
Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately
(configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or
D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l
determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.

Dependent on the respective position of control the P63x will issue the following logic
state signals:

… MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf


or
… MAIN: Command from HMI
or
… MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data
memory:

… DEVxx: Open cmd. received


… DEVxx: Close cmd. received

Selecting the switchgear


unit to be controlled and
generating a switching
request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to
this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the front panel HMI using the
selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching request.
(It should be noted that the front panel HMI on the P63x does not feature specific keys
for switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made, then this
would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this example
M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y . (See section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1
to Fx, particularly as control keys'.)

For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for
switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the communication interface,
the control commands ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the switchgear unit to be
controlled.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-53


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

LOC: Loc.acc.
block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC: Return t.
illum. trg
305 550

MAIN: Interlock
equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]

DEV01
DEV01: Open
request
307 000

DEV01: Close
request
307 001

MAIN: Electrical
control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local

1: Remote

LOC:Rem.acc.block.
active
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.
ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n

Selected signal

DEV01: Inp.asg.el.
ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]

Selected signal

COMM1: Open DEV01: Open cmd.


Command DEV01 received
[ --- --- ] [ 218 000 ]

DEV01: Close cmd.


COMM1: Close received
Command DEV01 [ 218 001 ]
[ --- --- ]

DEV01: Latching MAIN: Cmd. fr.


time comm.interf
[ 210 005 ] [ 221 101 ]

DEV01: End open


command307 002

DEV01: End close


command
307 003

MAIN: End command


306 028
DEV01: Latching
time elaps.
307 012

DEV01: Latching
time runn .
307 011

12Z62AAA_EN

U-30 Generating a switching request with remote control via the communication interface

U-54 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Enabling switching
commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P63x checks the interlocking conditions
defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted
or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function
can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a
switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the
conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.

U-31 Assignment of equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands and enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-55


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay interlock for operation


with the station interlock
function
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a
communication link with the substation control level. If the P63x detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an
automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.

If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay
interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching
request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will
then be a check – taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether
switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling
command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay
interlock is still present. Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be
carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the
bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be
considered.

U-32 Enabling of switching commands by the station interlock

U-56 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Linking protection
commands to switching
commands
For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals.
The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection
functions. The Bay Panel defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly
without a check of the interlocking conditions.

U-33 Linking to the protection commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-57


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Issuing switching
commands
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . m o d e c m d . ) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to
time control.

External termination control


If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control
process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then
be necessary to set the P63x at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary
signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination
contacts.

U-58 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Protection
trip cmd.
307 013

DEV01: Protect.
close cmd.
307 014

MAIN: Cmd.
Dur.Long Cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
MAIN: Cmd. Dur.
Short Cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01: Oper.
Mode Cmd.
[ 210 024 ]

1
2
3

1: Long command
2: Short command

3: Time control

DEV01: Open
Command
[ 210 028 ]

DEV01: Close
MAIN: Device Command
On-Line [ 210 029 ]
[ 003 030 ]
1: No (= off)
MAIN: Enable
Control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN: Type of
Bay
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01: Enable
SI Open
307 004

DEV01: Enable
BI Open
307 019

DEV01: Open
request
307 000

DEV01: Enable
SI Close
307 005

DEV01: Enable
BI Close
307 020

DEV01: Close
request
307 001

63Z70AGA_UK

U-34 Issuing of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-59


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time control of switching


commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is
started. The P63x expects a status signal – ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ – to be issued by the
switchgear unit within the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring. The
status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P63x, which can be set to debouncing and
chatter suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in
section 'Main Functions of the P63x'). For the duration of the set time delay for running
time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position
- either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status


will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position.
Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated
status is signaled.

If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position after the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected


(M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No’) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position status signal is received or the set time delay for running time monitoring has
elapsed (see Figure U-30).

If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected


(M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes’) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is
issued while the set time delay for running time monitoring is active.

Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

U-60 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Interm.
Pos. Suppr.
[ 210 012 ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes

DEV01: Inp.Asg.
Sw.Tr. Plug
[ 210 014 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3

Signal n

Disabled
Selected signal

DEV01: Switch.
DEV01: Gr. Device Open
Assign. Debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ]

DEV01: Switch.
Device Closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01: Dev.
Interm./Flt.Pos
[ 210 038 ]
Selected group S1 1
R1

S1 1
C
R1

DEV01: Open S1 1
Signal EXT
[ 210 030 ] R1
Debouncing
& DEV01: End
Chatter suppression
Open Command
DEV01: Closed DEV01: Op.Time 307 002
Signal EXT Switch. Dev.
[ 210 031 ] [ 210 004 ]
DEV01: End
Close Command
307 003

DEV01: Open DEV01: Switch.


Command Device runn.
[ 210 028 ] 307 010

DEV01: Close
Command DEV01: Stat.
[ 210 029 ] Ind.Interm.Pos.
[ 210 027 ]
DEV01: Start
runn.time mon.
307 008
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

0
1
2
3
DEV01: Control
0 ... 3 State
[ 210 018 ]
0: Intermediate pos.
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position

12Z51AKB_UK

U-35 Monitoring of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-61


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time monitoring without external


run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close
command
210 029 1

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4

1 10 ms

3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004

19Z5201A_EN

U-36 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control

U-62 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time monitoring with external


run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037

DEV01:Inp.asg.
end Close
210 016

1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

19Z5202A_EN

U-37 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-63


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Monitoring the number of


CB operations permitted
The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time delay may be set with
parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . Associated with this parameter is the
counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . to which the maximum number of CB
operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that
has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at M A I N : C B 1 r e a d y f c t . a s s i g n .

The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x .


o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation of the CB
is recognized from the contact position signals D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n
and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .

The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value


of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality, in
particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.e.
M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.

U-64 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.9 Interlocking Logic (Function group ILOCK) - (P632, P633 only)

Commands issued to electrically controllable switchgear units within the bay are only
enabled after a check of the interlock conditions has been carried out. Interlock
conditions are defined in the interlocking logic by Boolean equations.

With the selection of a bay type the bay interlock conditions are defined automatically for
the 'Open' and 'Close' commands to control switchgear units within the bay. Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station
interlock (see 'List of Bay Types' in the Appendix). These interlock conditions, defined
automatically with the selection of a bay type, can always be modified to system
requirements by the user. The following signals acquired by the P63x can be logically
linked for the bay interlock.

… Function blocks 1 and 2


… The output signals from the programmable logic function
… The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from
switchgear units
… The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from single-
pole signals

A maximum of 32 equations, each with 32 equation elements, are available to define the
interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number
equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-65


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-38 Interlock logic shown in the example for equation 1

U-66 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.10 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) - (P632, P633 only)

Commands may be transmitted to the P63x via the communications interface. When the
P63x receives such a command, and the remote control mode is enabled, an
appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal will be issued.

The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command.
The following operating mode settings are available:

… Long Command
… Short Command
… Persistent Command

If the operating mode 'long' or 'short' command has been selected the output relay will
be triggered for the time delay set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.

The setting possibilities and the functional sequence is displayed in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.

U-39 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Command C001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-67


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.11 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) - (P632, P633 only)

Binary single-pole signals issued by the system and presented to appropriately


configured binary inputs can be transmitted by the P63x to the control station.

A binary input signal is conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section
‘Main Functions of the P63x’). Such a conditioned signal is available as a logic signal at
SIG_1: Logic signal Sxxx.

The signaling behavior over the communication interface is defined by the setting of the
operating mode. The following operating mode settings are available:

… Without Function
… Start/End Signal
… Transient Signal

If 'Without function' has been set then no message will be sent when the state at the
binary signal input changes. If 'Start/End Signal' has been set then a message will be
sent any time the state at the binary signal input changes. The 'Start Signal' must
remain at logic ' 1 ' for the set minimum time in order to be accepted and sent with the
message. If 'Transient Signal' has been set then messages will only be sent when the
state at the binary signal input changes from logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 '

The following diagram shows setting options and the functional sequence in the example
for Signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole signals.

U-68 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-40 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Signal S001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-69


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

3 Design

3.1 Detachable HMI

Application
As a further option in the model versions P631 to P634 there is now (as of version -611)
a variant available that includes a detachable HMI. This variant is especially designed
for applications where protection and control units are directly installed into bay panels
situated in medium-voltage substations and, because of structural constraints, there is
only limited space available. The detachable HMI with its small dimensions may be fitted
here in a convenient spot and at an ergonomic height.

Detachable HMI
Configuration and operation of the protection and control unit is carried out from the
integrated front panel user interface (HMI) or via the PC interface on the detachable HMI
which is designed in 40TE width. To connect the detachable HMI to the protection and
control unit, standard RJ45 cables (Ethernet cable, length max. 10 m) may be used.
A 3 m standard RJ45 Ethernet cable is included with the shipment.

A connection to the detachable HMI may be established or separated at any time as the
detachable HMI is recognized automatically and completely.

Basic unit
For the detachable HMI option, the basic unit is available with case widths of 40TE or
84TE in either a flush-mounted or a surface-mounted case and is provided in several
variants for an effortless adaptation to meet local operating conditions. The front plate
includes 4 LED indicators for display purposes as well as the RJ45 interface to connect
the detachable HMI.

Operation without the


detachable HMI
The function of the protection and control unit is fully guaranteed even when the
detachable HMI is not connected or the communication link between detachable HMI
and the basic unit is interrupted. In such a case the basic unit is accessed via its PC
interface. The function parameters for the front panel user interface (HMI) and for LED
indicators, available only on the detachable HMI, are automatically hidden in this event.

LED indicators on the


detachable HMI
The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI offer multi-color
function assignment. Separate function assignments for the red and the green LED
color indications are available. When both the red and the green LED indicators are
simultaneously active the resulting color will be amber (yellow).

Function keys on the


detachable HMI
The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Further
information on the function keys and their application can be found in section
'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as
well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and
section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

U-70 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z61TDA

U-41 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case – front view.

12Z61ABA

U-42 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detachable HMI – front view
The detachable HMI on the basic unit with 84TE case also has a width of 40TE.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-71


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

49Z6202A

U-43 Detachable HMI – rear view

U-72 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4 User Interface (HMI)

4.1 Display and Keypad

Display and Keypad


The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with an LCD display containing 4 x 20
alphanumeric characters.

Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD
and, with 40TE case (P631, P632, P633) and 84TE case (P632, P633, P634) devices,
there are (as of version -611) six additional freely configurable function keys situated to
the right of the LCD.

Furthermore the front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with 17 LED indicators,
mounted vertically to the left of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys.

Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section
'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as
well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and
section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

H4 TRIP
H3 ALARM
F1 H18
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1 HEALTHY
H17 EDIT MODE
F2 H19
H5
H6
H7 F3 H20

H8 CG
H9
H10
G F4 H21
H11
H12
F5
G

G G H22
H13
H14
H15
G F6 H23
H16

12 Z6100B_EN

U-44 View of the front panel HMI

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-73


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Availability of the bay panel


Only the protection units P632 and P633 provide bay panels under the following
conditions:

1. On the hardware side the protection unit has to have been upgraded with a control
functionality. This requires that the optional binary I/O module to control switchgear
units has been ordered and is fitted to a slot.
2. A further condition is that the protection units are fitted with a communication module
with selectable communication protocol or the Ethernet module as well as with the
new front panel user interface (HMI) that includes function keys.
3. A bay type has been selected with parameter M A I N : T y p e o f b a y .

Bay panels
If available the bay panel will display switching state signals from external devices
(closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote).
The text display will show up to 3 external devices, one per line, where the external
device selected is marked with the flashing ">" symbol to the left of the external devices’
designation text.

X0 :Interm. pos.
>Q0 :Interm. pos.
Q8 :Interm. pos.
Local Locked

U-45 Example of a bay panel

The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their


numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there are up
to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their current state
is displayed ('Interm. pos.', 'Open', 'Closed' or 'Faulty pos.').

The active control unit ('Remote' or 'Local') is displayed in the fourth line and whether it is
'Locked' or 'Unlocked'.

Keys
In addition to the keys documented in the operating manual there are now (as of version
-611) six freely configurable function keys available:

F1 F6
… Function keys to
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on
assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function
Keys (Function Group F_KEY)". More details on handling function keys can be found
in this chapter, in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and in
section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

U-74 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)

Function keys available as


of version -611
If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only
after the password for function keys has been entered.

Exception: If a function key has been configured at M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y the


function will only switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' control after the password has been
entered, but switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the
password (see also section 4.3).

It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only
after the password (as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 ) has been
entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is
disabled until the password is entered again.

For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the
factory-set password. If the user has changed the password (see the chapter entitled
"Changing the Password"), the following description will apply accordingly.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-75


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Control Step / Description Control Display


Action

0 Example of a display. Curr. IP,max,a prim.


75 A
Curr. IP,max,b prim.
750 A

1 Function key F1 is pressed. Eight asterisks F1

(*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to


enter the password. ********

2a Press the following keys in sequence:


G

G
'Left'
*

'Down' G

G
*

'Right' G
G

'Up’ G

The display will change as shown in the


G

column on the right.


*

Now press the ENTER key. Curr. IP,max,a prim.


75 A
If the correct password has been entered, the Curr. IP,max,b prim.
active display will re-appear. 750 A
Function key F1 is now active for the set return
time. (Each function key is protected by its
own password, and the return time elapses
individually for each function key after the
correct password has been entered!
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown above in Step 1 will appear.

2b This control step can be cancelled at any C Curr. IP,max,a prim.


75 A
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the Curr. IP,max,b prim.
ENTER key is pressed. 750 A

3 Press F1 again. The function configured to F1 Curr. IP,max,a prim.


75 A
this function key is carried out. Curr. IP,max,b prim.
750 A

4 When function keys are pressed while the Fx Curr. IP,max,a prim.
75 A
return time period of the function key is Curr. IP,max,b prim.
elapsing, then the configured function is carried 750 A
out directly, e.g. without again checking for the
password.

U-76 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as Control Keys


(P632, P633 only)

Function keys as control


keys, as of version -620
As described in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in
Chapter 3 function keys F1 to Fx may be configured as control keys at
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see the previous section) and
the configuration to 'Key/Switch' is ignored.

In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the four
function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.

• MAIN: Local/Remote key


The 'Local/Remote' control command is effective only in the bay panel except
where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the functionality set at H M I : F c t . A s s i g n . L / R k e y , the
'Local/Remote' command toggles either between 'Remote' and 'Local' control,
or between 'Local/Remote' and 'Local' control. (The parameter
H M I : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y may be set either to R <-> L or to
R & L <-> L and will then define which of the two switching modes is active.)
If the 'Local/Remote' command is configured such that it will switch from
'Remote' control to 'Local' control, then this can only occur if the password has
first been entered at H M I : P a s s w o r d L / R . Switching from 'Local' to
'Remote' control will occur without checking the password. (See also section
"Configuring the Measured Value Panels and Selection of the Control Point
(Function Group HMI)".)

• MAIN: Device selection key


This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if 'Local'
control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices’
designation text.

• MAIN: Device OPEN key


The 'OPEN' command is effective in the bay panel only.
Pressing the key assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit
– taking into account the interlock equation – to assume the 'open' status.

• MAIN: Device CLOSE key


The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-77


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

5 Settings

5.1 Parameters

5.1.1 Device Identification

Device DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000

Order number for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.

5.1.2 Configuration Parameters

User interface LOC: Password L/R 221 040

The password used to change the setting from 'Remote' to 'Local' control
can be defined here. (Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control occurs
without checking the password.)
LOC: Display L/R 221 070

This setting defines whether the control site – 'Local' or 'Remote' – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071

This setting defines whether the 'Locked' or 'Unlocked' status shall be


displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208

This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches


between remote / local control (L↔R) or between 'Remote' and 'Local'
control / 'Local' control (R&L↔L).
LOC: Return time select. 221 030

If the user does not press a key on the front panel user interface (HMI)
during this set time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is
cancelled.

Communication interface 1 COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178

The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the 103
protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is


enabled.

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Update Measurements 104 229

Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report


Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP 104 230

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I P

U-78 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

IEC: Dead band IN 104 231

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I N
IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d V P P
IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : Dead band VPG
IEC: Dead band f 104 234

Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d f
IEC: Dead band P 104 235

Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d P
IEC: Dead band phi 104 236

Setting to calculate the filter value for all φ Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d p h i
IEC: Dead band Z 104 237

Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238

Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-79


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239

Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C
IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240

Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d t e m p .
IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241

Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d 2 0 m A
IEC: DEV control model 221 081

Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices.


Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum
safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).

U-80 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000

Substation Event GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Applic. ID 108 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Applic. ID 108 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Applic. ID 108 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Applic. ID 108 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Applic. ID 108 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Applic. ID 108 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Applic. ID 108 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Applic. ID 108 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Applic. ID 108 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Applic. ID 108 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Applic. ID 108 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Applic. ID 108 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Applic. ID 108 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Applic. ID 108 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Applic. ID 108 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Applic. ID 110 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Applic. ID 110 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Applic. ID 110 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Applic. ID 110 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Applic. ID 110 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Applic. ID 110 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Applic. ID 110 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Applic. ID 110 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Applic. ID 110 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Applic. ID 110 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Applic. ID 110 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Applic. ID 110 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Applic. ID 110 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Applic. ID 110 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Applic. ID 110 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Applic. ID 110 150

Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for


the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Goose ID 108 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Goose ID 108 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Goose ID 108 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Goose ID 108 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Goose ID 108 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Goose ID 108 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Goose ID 108 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Goose ID 108 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Goose ID 108 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Goose ID 108 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Goose ID 108 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Goose ID 108 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Goose ID 108 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Goose ID 108 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Goose ID 108 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Goose ID 110 001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-81


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Goose ID 110 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Goose ID 110 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Goose ID 110 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Goose ID 110 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Goose ID 110 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Goose ID 110 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Goose ID 110 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Goose ID 110 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Goose ID 110 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Goose ID 110 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Goose ID 110 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Goose ID 110 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Goose ID 110 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Goose ID 110 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Goose ID 110 151

Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned
external devices.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataSetRef 108 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataSetRef 108 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataSetRef 108 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataSetRef 108 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataSetRef 108 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataSetRef 108 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataSetRef 108 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataSetRef 108 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataSetRef 108 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataSetRef 108 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataSetRef 108 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataSetRef 108 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataSetRef 108 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataSetRef 108 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataSetRef 108 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataSetRef 110 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataSetRef 110 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataSetRef 110 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataSetRef 110 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataSetRef 110 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataSetRef 110 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataSetRef 110 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataSetRef 110 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataSetRef 110 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataSetRef 110 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataSetRef 110 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataSetRef 110 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataSetRef 110 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataSetRef 110 132

U-82 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataSetRef 110 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataSetRef 110 152

'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device


(IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters
including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on
the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data
attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first
20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataObjInd 108 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataObjInd 108 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataObjInd 108 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataObjInd 108 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataObjInd 108 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataObjInd 108 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataObjInd 108 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataObjInd 108 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataObjInd 108 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataObjInd 108 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataObjInd 108 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataObjInd 108 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataObjInd 108 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataObjInd 108 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataObjInd 108 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataObjInd 110 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataObjInd 110 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataObjInd 110 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataObjInd 110 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataObjInd 110 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataObjInd 110 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataObjInd 110 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataObjInd 110 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataObjInd 110 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataObjInd 110 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataObjInd 110 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataObjInd 110 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataObjInd 110 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataObjInd 110 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataObjInd 110 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataObjInd 110 153

Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this


device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element
in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DatAttrInd 108 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DatAttrInd 108 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DatAttrInd 108 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DatAttrInd 108 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DatAttrInd 108 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DatAttrInd 108 064

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-83


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DatAttrInd 108 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DatAttrInd 108 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DatAttrInd 108 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DatAttrInd 108 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DatAttrInd 108 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DatAttrInd 108 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DatAttrInd 108 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DatAttrInd 108 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DatAttrInd 108 154

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DatAttrInd 110 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DatAttrInd 110 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DatAttrInd 110 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DatAttrInd 110 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DatAttrInd 110 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DatAttrInd 110 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DatAttrInd 110 064

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DatAttrInd 110 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DatAttrInd 110 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DatAttrInd 110 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DatAttrInd 110 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DatAttrInd 110 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DatAttrInd 110 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DatAttrInd 110 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DatAttrInd 110 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DatAttrInd 110 154

Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this


device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute
element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 default 108 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 default 108 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 default 108 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 default 108 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 default 108 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 default 108 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 default 108 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 default 108 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 default 108 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 default 108 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 default 108 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 default 108 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 default 108 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 default 108 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 default 108 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 default 110 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 default 110 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 default 110 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 default 110 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 default 110 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 default 110 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 default 110 065

U-84 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 default 110 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 default 110 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 default 110 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 default 110 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 default 110 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 default 110 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 default 110 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 default 110 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 default 110 155

Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to
default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a
GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-85


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Binary input INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-23

Input filter which is activated when either the mode 'Active "High", Filt.' or
'Active "Low", Filt.' has been selected. In order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this
parameter to 6 [steps]. See Chapter 'Operation' for further information.

Main function MAIN: Type of bay 220 001

Configuration of a bay type.


MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062

If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type
number will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the
number ' 0 ' will be displayed.

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047

DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097

DEV03: Function group DEV03 210 147

Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the


configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034

DEV02: Funct. type, signal 210 084

DEV03: Funct. type, signal 210 134

Setting the function type of the signal.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035

DEV02: Inform. No., signal 210 085

DEV03: Inform. No., signal 210 135

Setting the information number of the signal.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.
DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032

DEV02: Funct. type, command 210 082

DEV03: Funct. type, command 210 132

Setting the function type of the command.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.

U-86 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033

DEV02: Inform. No., command 210 083

DEV03: Inform. No., command 210 133

Setting the information number of the command.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102

Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the


function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

Single-pole commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252

Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the


function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004

CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009

CMD_1: Command C003 config. 200 014

CMD_1: Command C004 config. 200 019

CMD_1: Command C005 config. 200 024

CMD_1: Command C006 config. 200 029

CMD_1: Command C007 config. 200 034

CMD_1: Command C008 config. 200 039

CMD_1: Command C009 config. 200 044

CMD_1: Command C010 config. 200 049

CMD_1: Command C011 config. 200 054

CMD_1: Command C012 config. 200 059

Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.


If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden, with the exception of this setting.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-87


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250

Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the


function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007

SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015

SIG_1: Signal S003 config. 226 023

SIG_1: Signal S004 config. 226 031

SIG_1: Signal S005 config. 226 039

SIG_1: Signal S006 config. 226 047

SIG_1: Signal S007 config. 226 055

SIG_1: Signal S008 config. 226 063

SIG_1: Signal S009 config. 226 071

SIG_1: Signal S010 config. 226 079

SIG_1: Signal S011 config. 226 087

SIG_1: Signal S012 config. 226 095

Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration.


If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden..

5.1.3 Function Settings

5.1.3.1 Global

Main function MAIN: Time tag 221 098

For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time
tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse
edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating
data memory are made in chronological order or not.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open 021 017

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open 021 061

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 open 021 063

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 open 021 065

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057

Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output


enable.
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 221 206

Setting the debouncing time.


MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 221 207

Setting the chatter monitoring time.

U-88 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202

MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205

MAIN: Change of state gr.3 221 208

Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230

Setting the command duration for a long command.


MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231

Setting the command duration for a short command.


MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007

Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control


commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008

Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065

When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to
control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061

This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to
control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079

After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal
continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from
the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status
signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063

This setting defines whether there is an intervention in the control process


of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external


protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012

Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form
the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to signal the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed 021 020

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed 021 060

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 closed 021 062

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 closed 021 064

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB closed'
position signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-89


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050

Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an


external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024

Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051

MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052

Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group


signal).

5.1.3.2 General Functions

Single-pole commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000

CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005

CMD_1: Design. command C003 200 010

CMD_1: Design. command C004 200 015

CMD_1: Design. command C005 200 020

CMD_1: Design. command C006 200 025

CMD_1: Design. command C007 200 030

CMD_1: Design. command C008 200 035

CMD_1: Design. command C009 200 040

CMD_1: Design. command C010 200 045

CMD_1: Design. command C011 200 050

CMD_1: Design. command C012 200 055

Selection of the command designation.


CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C003 200 012

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C004 200 017

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C005 200 022

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C006 200 027

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C007 200 032

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C008 200 037

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C009 200 042

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C010 200 047

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C011 200 052

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C012 200 057

Selection of the command operating mode.

U-90 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S003 226 016

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S004 226 024

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S005 226 032

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S006 226 040

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S007 226 048

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S008 226 056

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S009 226 064

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S010 226 072

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S011 226 080

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S012 226 088

Selection of the signal designation.


SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S003 226 017

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S004 226 025

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S005 226 033

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S006 226 041

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S007 226 049

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S008 226 057

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S009 226 065

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S010 226 073

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S011 226 081

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S012 226 089

Selection of the signal operating mode.


SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S003 226 019

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S004 226 027

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S005 226 035

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S006 226 043

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S007 226 051

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S008 226 059

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S009 226 067

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S010 226 075

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S011 226 083

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S012 226 091

Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-91


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090

The logic ' 1 ' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that
a telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.

5.1.3.3 Setting Groups

Main function MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx 019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end A of the transformer.


MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx 019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end B of the transformer.


MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx 019 019 019 059 019 063 019 067

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end C of the transformer.


MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx 019 037 019 060 019 064 019 068

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end D of the transformer.

5.1.3.4 Control

Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003

Selecting the bay interlocking function from the front panel user interface
(HMI).
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002

Selecting the station interlocking function from the front panel user interface
(HMI).
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014

MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022

Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.


MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029

Setting the operate delay of the function blocks.


MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084

MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. 221 088

Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).

U-92 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085

MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign 221 089

Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap.

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000

DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050

DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. 210 100

Setting the designation of the respective external device.


DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004

DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054

DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. 210 104

Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).


DEV01: Latching time 210 005

DEV02: Latching time 210 055

DEV03: Latching time 210 105

Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear


position signal – "Open" or "Closed" – has been received.
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011

DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061

DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111

Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and
chatter suppression.
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012

DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062

DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112

This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be


suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027

DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077

DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127

This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024

DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074

DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. 210 124

Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014

DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064

DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 114

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in /


unplugged) of the switch truck plug.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-93


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 121

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 1” of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 072

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 122

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 2” of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023

DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073

DEV03: With close cmd./prot 210 123

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close
command" of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the open position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015

DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open 210 065

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Open 210 115

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Open' command.

U-94 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016

DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Close 210 116

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Close' command.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025

DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075

DEV03: Open w/o stat.interl 210 125

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted


without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026

DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076

DEV03: Close w/o stat. int. 210 126

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted


without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 139

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.

Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 140

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.

Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-95


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.

U-96 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 250 002

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 250 003

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 250 004

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 250 005

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 250 006

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 250 007

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 250 008

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 250 009

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 250 010

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.12 250 011

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.13 250 012

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.14 250 013

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.15 250 014

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.16 250 015

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.17 250 016

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.18 250 017

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.19 250 018

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.20 250 019

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.21 250 020

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.22 250 021

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.23 250 022

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.24 250 023

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.25 250 024

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.26 250 025

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.27 250 026

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.28 250 027

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.29 250 028

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.30 250 029

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.31 250 030

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.32 250 031

Definition of the interlock conditions.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-97


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6 Information and Control Functions

6.1 Healthy

6.1.1 Cyclic Values

6.1.1.1 Physical State Signals

Binary input INP: State U 901 152 144

INP: State U 902 152 147

INP: State U 903 152 150

INP: State U 904 152 153

INP: State U 1001 152 162

INP: State U 1002 152 165

INP: State U 1003 152 168

INP: State U 1004 152 171

INP: State U 1005 152 174

INP: State U 1006 152 177

The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

… 'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

… 'Low': Not energized.

… 'High': Energized.

This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.

U-98 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Binary output OUTP: State K 901 150 192

OUTP: State K 902 150 195

OUTP: State K 903 150 198

OUTP: State K 904 150 201

OUTP: State K 905 150 204

OUTP: State K 906 150 207

OUTP: State K 907 150 210

OUTP: State K 908 150 213

OUTP: State K 1001 150 216

OUTP: State K 1002 150 219

OUTP: State K 1003 150 222

OUTP: State K 1004 150 225

OUTP: State K 1005 150 228

OUTP: State K 1006 150 231

OUTP: State K 1007 150 234

OUTP: State K 1008 150 237

The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

… 'Without function': No functions are assigned to the output relay.


… 'Low': The output relay is not energized.
… 'High': The output relay is energized.

This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.

6.1.1.2 Logic State Signals

User interface LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Control reservation 221 082

Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device


("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").

Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000

Substation Event
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 position 109 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 position 109 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 position 109 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 position 109 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 position 109 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 position 109 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 position 109 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 position 109 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 position 109 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 position 109 055

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-99


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 position 109 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 position 109 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 position 109 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position 109 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 position 109 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 position 109 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 position 109 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 position 109 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 position 109 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 position 109 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 position 109 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 position 109 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 position 109 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 position 109 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 position 109 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 position 109 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 position 109 160

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 position 109 165

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 position 109 170

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 position 109 175

State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an


external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 open 109 006

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 open 109 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 open 109 016

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 open 109 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 open 109 026

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 open 109 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 open 109 036

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 open 109 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 open 109 046

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 open 109 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 open 109 056

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 open 109 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 open 109 066

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 open 109 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open 109 076

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 open 109 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 open 109 106

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 open 109 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 open 109 116

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 open 109 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 open 109 126

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 open 109 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 open 109 136

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 open 109 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 open 109 146

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 open 109 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 open 109 156

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 open 109 161

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 open 109 166

U-100 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 open 109 171

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 open 109 176

Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 closed 109 007

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 closed 109 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 closed 109 017

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 closed 109 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 closed 109 027

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 closed 109 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 closed 109 037

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 closed 109 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 closed 109 047

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 closed 109 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 closed 109 057

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 closed 109 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 closed 109 067

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 closed 109 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 077

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 closed 109 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 closed 109 107

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 closed 109 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 closed 109 117

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 closed 109 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 closed 109 127

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 closed 109 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 closed 109 137

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 closed 109 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 closed 109 147

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 closed 109 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 closed 109 157

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 closed 109 162

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 closed 109 167

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 closed 109 172

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 closed 109 177

Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 interm.pos 109 008

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 interm.pos 109 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 interm.pos 109 018

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 interm.pos 109 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 interm.pos 109 028

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 interm.pos 109 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 interm.pos 109 038

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 interm.pos 109 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 interm.pos 109 048

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 interm.pos 109 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 interm.pos 109 058

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 interm.pos 109 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 interm.pos 109 068

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-101


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 interm.pos 109 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos 109 078

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 interm.pos 109 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 interm.pos 109 108

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 interm.pos 109 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 interm.pos 109 118

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 interm.pos 109 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 interm.pos 109 128

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 interm.pos 109 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 interm.pos 109 138

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 interm.pos 109 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 interm.pos 109 148

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 interm.pos 109 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 interm.pos 109 158

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 interm.pos 109 163

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 interm.pos 109 168

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 interm.pos 109 173

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 interm.pos 109 178

GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250

Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,


representing the state of an external device.

Main function MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT 031 028

MAIN: CB2 open 3p EXT 031 046

MAIN: CB3 open 3p EXT 031 047

MAIN: CB4 open 3p EXT 031 048

MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT 036 051

MAIN: CB2 closed 3p EXT 036 230

MAIN: CB3 closed 3p EXT 036 231

MAIN: CB4 closed 3p EXT 036 232

MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086

MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT 221 090

MAIN: Enable control 221 058

MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001

MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000

MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015

MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023

MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018

MAIN: CB tripped 221 016

MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017

MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054

MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053

MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055

MAIN: Communication error 221 019

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101

MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102

MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103

Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-83
Protection

U-102 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030

DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031

DEV01: Control state 210 018

DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036

DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037

DEV01: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 038

DEV01: Open command 210 028

DEV01: Close command 210 029

DEV01: Switch. device open 218 000

DEV01: Switch.device closed 218 001

DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080

DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081

DEV02: Control state 210 068

DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086

DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087

DEV02: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 088

DEV02: Open command 210 078

DEV02: Close command 210 079

DEV02: Switch. device open 218 002

DEV02: Switch.device closed 218 003

DEV03: Open signal EXT 210 130

DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131

DEV03: Control state 210 118

DEV03: Switch. device open 210 136

DEV03: Switch.device closed 210 137

DEV03: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 138

DEV03: Open command 210 128

DEV03: Close command 210 129

DEV03: Switch. device open 218 004

DEV03: Switch.device closed 218 005

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033

ILOCK: Output 3 250 034

ILOCK: Output 4 250 035

ILOCK: Output 5 250 036

ILOCK: Output 6 250 037

ILOCK: Output 7 250 038

ILOCK: Output 8 250 039

ILOCK: Output 9 250 040

ILOCK: Output 10 250 041

ILOCK: Output 11 250 042

ILOCK: Output 12 250 043

ILOCK: Output 13 250 044

ILOCK: Output 14 250 045

ILOCK: Output 15 250 046

ILOCK: Output 16 250 047

ILOCK: Output 17 250 048

ILOCK: Output 18 250 049

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-103


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

ILOCK: Output 19 250 050

ILOCK: Output 20 250 051

ILOCK: Output 21 250 052

ILOCK: Output 22 250 053

ILOCK: Output 23 250 054

ILOCK: Output 24 250 055

ILOCK: Output 25 250 056

ILOCK: Output 26 250 057

ILOCK: Output 27 250 058

ILOCK: Output 28 250 059

ILOCK: Output 29 250 060

ILOCK: Output 30 250 061

ILOCK: Output 31 250 062

ILOCK: Output 32 250 063

U-104 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006

CMD_1: Command C003 200 011

CMD_1: Command C004 200 016

CMD_1: Command C005 200 021

CMD_1: Command C006 200 026

CMD_1: Command C007 200 031

CMD_1: Command C008 200 036

CMD_1: Command C009 200 041

CMD_1: Command C010 200 046

CMD_1: Command C011 200 051

CMD_1: Command C012 200 056

Single-pole signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004

SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005

SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012

SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013

SIG_1: Signal S003 EXT 226 020

SIG_1: Logic signal S003 226 021

SIG_1: Signal S004 EXT 226 028

SIG_1: Logic signal S004 226 029

SIG_1: Signal S005 EXT 226 036

SIG_1: Logic signal S005 226 037

SIG_1: Signal S006 EXT 226 044

SIG_1: Logic signal S006 226 045

SIG_1: Signal S007 EXT 226 052

SIG_1: Logic signal S007 226 053

SIG_1: Signal S008 EXT 226 060

SIG_1: Logic signal S008 226 061

SIG_1: Signal S009 EXT 226 068

SIG_1: Logic signal S009 226 069

SIG_1: Signal S010 EXT 226 076

SIG_1: Logic signal S010 226 077

SIG_1: Signal S011 EXT 226 084

SIG_1: Logic signal S011 226 085

SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092

SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-105


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6.1.2 Control and Testing

Measured data input MEASI: Reset Tmax USER 003 045

Resetting of measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx


(x=1...9) to the updated measured values.

Measured data output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116

Resetting the measured data output function.

Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080

Protection Resetting the measured event values f < > : M a x . f r e q u . f o r f > and
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<.

6.2 Fault and Event Records

6.2.1 Event Counters

Main function MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087

MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. 221 091

Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Operation counter 210 043

DEV02: Operation counter 210 093

DEV03: Operation counter 210 143

DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003

DEV02: Dev. op. capability 210 053

DEV03: Dev. op. capability 210 103

U-106 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Appendix – List of Bay Types (P632, P633 version -620 only)


Key

Sorting the Bay Types

The bay types are sorted by the criteria listed below. These criteria are encoded in the first
three characters of the bay type code (example: A11.100.R01) given in brackets after the
Bay Type No. (example: Sorting is first by "Type of bay" in the order given below, then within
each group by the second and third character in ascending order.

… Type of bay
„ A – Feeder Bay
„ L – Longitudinal Coupler
„ T – Transversal Coupler
„ K – Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay
„ M – Busbar Measurement
„ N – Busbar Grounding
„ X – Other bay type

… Number of busbars
„ - Single busbar
„ - Double busbar
„ - Without busbar / other configurations

… Equipment
„ - Bays with switch truck or withdrawable switchgear assembly
„ - Bays with two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors on switch trucks or
withdrawable switchgear assembly
„ - Bays with stationary switchgear units
„ - Bays with stationary switchgear units and three-position disconnector
„ - Other bay types

Bay Type No.: This number indicates the value to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y


(folder "Set/Conf") in order to configure the unit for the selected bay
type.

Special Designations for External Devices:


Mot.relay: Motor relay
Shunt wd. Shunt winding

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-1


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Table "Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays"

Column "Switchgear unit" This column begins with the designation for the external device (switchgear
unit). The function group follows in brackets.
The function group encompasses all setting options for monitoring the
switchgear unit and its signals.
"Open" and "Close(d)" indicate the signal message or control direction of the
switchgear unit.

Column "Binary Input": The "Open" or "Closed" signal should be connected to the binary input U xxxx.
The connection points of the binary input U xxxx are shown in the terminal
connection diagrams. For the P63x in 40TE case, the positions of the binary input
boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6
B: Slot 7
C: Slot 8

Column "Output relay" The "Open" or "Close" control of the switchgear unit is effected via output relay
K xxxx. The connection points of the output relay K xxxx are shown in the terminal
connection diagrams. For the P63X in 40TE case, the positions of the binary output
boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6
B: Slot 7

Table "Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking"

Note:
The interlock equations are stored at substation control level, not at unit level.

Symbols used in the Boolean interlock equations:


/: Negation
0: Switchgear unit "Open"
I: Switchgear unit "Closed"
X: Switchgear unit in intermediate position

FctBl1: Function block 1, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 1


(Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")

FctBl2: Function block 2, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 2


(Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")

U-App-2 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

List of P63x Bay Panel types

Bay type (Identification):

A – Feeder Bay L – Bus Sectionalizer Bay


2 (A11.100.R01) 133 (L11.100.R01)
3 (A11.100.R02) 553 (L11.100.R01.2)
4 (A11.101.R01) 134 (L11.100.R02)
5 (A11.101.R02) 528 (L11.102.R01)
6 (A11.101.R03) 542 (L11.102.R01.2)
523 (A11.108.R01) 135 (L11.104.R01)
7 (A11.200.R01) 136 (L11.104.R02)
8 (A11.200.R02) 137 (L11.104.R03)
9 (A11.201.R01) 138 (L11.116.R01)
10 (A11.201.R02) 545 (L11.116.R01.2)
11 (A11.201.R03) 139 (L11.116.R03)
12 (A11.400.R01) 148 (L11.200.R01)
13 (A11.400.R02) 149 (L11.202.R01)
14 (A11.401.R01) 150 (L11.202.R03)
15 (A11.401.R02) 164 (L23.901.R02)
16 (A11.401.R03)
17 (A11.900.R01)
504 (A11.901.R00) T – Bus Coupler Bay
541 (A13.104.R01) 505 (Q21.100.R01)
19 (A13.105.R01) 563 (Q21.133.R01)
20 (A13.105.R02) 205 (Q23.101.R01)
21 (A13.105.R03) 206 (Q23.101.R03)
557 (A13.106.R03)
26 (A13.200.R01)
28 (A13.201.R01) M – Busbar Measurement Bay
29 (A13.201.R02) 171 (M11.300.R00)
31 (A13.205.R01) 172 (M11.300.R01)
32 (A13.205.R02) 540 (M11.304.R02)
33 (A13.205.R03) 173 (M11.900.R00)
34 (A13.400.R01) 174 (M11.900.R01)
36 (A13.401.R01) 176 (M13.312.R01)
37 (A13.401.R02) 177 (M13.312.R02)
39 (A13.405.R01) 506 (M13.902.R00)
40 (A13.405.R02) 233 (M15.903.R01)
41 (A13.405.R03) 179 (M15.903.R02)
503 (A13.432.R02) 188 (M23.302.R02)
507 (A13.433.R02) 189 (M23.312.R02)
43 (A15.105.R01) 193 (M23.902.R02)
221 (A15.105.R02) 559 (M23.904.R00)
44 (A15.105.R03) 560 (M23.908.R00)
87 (A23.104.R01) 194 (M23.912.R02)
88 (A23.104.R03)
101 (A23.204.R01)
102 (A23.204.R03) E – Busbar Grounding Bay
115 (A23.404.R01) 130 (E13.901.R01)
116 (A23.404.R03) 132 (E23.903.R02)

X – Other Bay Type


1 (X99.901.R00)

Customized Bay
999 (User)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-3


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay Type No. 2 (A11.100.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-4 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 3 (A11.100.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-5


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 4 (A11.101.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-6 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 5 (A11.101.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-7


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 6 (A11.101.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-8 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 523 (A11.108.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q15 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-9


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 7 (A11.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-10 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 8 (A11.200.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-11


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 9 (A11.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-12 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 10 (A11.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-13


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 11 (A11.201.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-14 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 12 (A11.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-15


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 13 (A11.400.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-16 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 14 (A11.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-17


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 15 (A11.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-18 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 16 (A11.401.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-19


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 17 (A11.900.R01)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-20 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 504 (A11.901.R00)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-21


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 541 (A13.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-22 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 19 (A13.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-23


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 20 (A13.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-24 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 21 (A13.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-25


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 557 (A13.106.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q9 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q9 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q9 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-26 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 26 (A13.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-27


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 28 (A13.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-28 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 29 (A13.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-29


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 31 (A13.205.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-30 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 32 (A13.205.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-31


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 33 (A13.205.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-32 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 34 (A13.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-33


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 36 (A13.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-34 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 37 (A13.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-35


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 39 (A13.405.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-36 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 40 (A13.405.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-37


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 41 (A13.405.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-38 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 503 (A13.432.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-39


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 507 (A13.433.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q15 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-40 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 43 (A15.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-41


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 221 (A15.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-42 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 44 (A15.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Open (Q0=I)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q8 Open (Q0=I)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-43


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 87 (A23.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-44 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 88 (A23.104.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-45


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 101 (A23.204.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 102 (A23.204.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-47


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 115 (A23.404.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 116 (A23.404.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q1 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q2 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-49


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 133 (L11.100.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-50 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 553 (L11.100.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-51


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 134 (L11.100.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 528 (L11.102.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q15 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-53


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 542 (L11.102.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q15 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-54 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 135 (L11.104.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-55


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 136 (L11.104.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-56 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 137 (L11.104.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q8 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (Q8=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X01=0)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-57


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 138 (L11.116.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
X02 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-58 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 545 (L11.116.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
X02 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-59


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 139 (L11.116.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
X02 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
X02 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
X02 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-60 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 148 (L13.200.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-61


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 149 (L13.202.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q15 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q16 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-62 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 150 (L13.202.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q15 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q16 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=I)
Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-63


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 164 (L23.901.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q11 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q21 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q11 Open (Q11=0)
Close(d) (Q11=I)
Q21 Open (Q21=0)
Close(d) (Q21=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-64 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 505 (Q21.100.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-65


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 563 (Q21.133.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X01 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
X02 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-66 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 205 (Q23.101.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q10 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
Q20 (DEV03) Open U A05 /
Close(d) U A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-67


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 206 (Q23.101.R03)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q10 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
Q20 (DEV03) Open U A05 K A05
Close(d) U A06 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q10 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q20 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q10 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q20 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-68 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 171 (M11.300.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV01) Open U A01 /
Close(d) U A02 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-69


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 172 (M11.300.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-70 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 540 (M11.304.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
X0 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-71


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 173 (M11.900.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV01) Open U A01 /
Close(d) U A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-72 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 174 (M11.900.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


X0 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-73


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 176 (M13.312.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q15 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-74 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 177 (M13.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q15 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-75


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 506 (M13.902.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 /
Close(d) U A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-76 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 233 (M15.903.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 /
Close(d) U A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-77


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 179 (M15.903.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q8 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)

U-App-78 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 188 (M23.302.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q2 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012) U B06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-79


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 189 (M23.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q25 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04
F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) U B05 /

F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012) U B06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-80 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 193 (M23.902.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q1 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q2 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-81


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 559 (M23.904.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 /
Close(d) U A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-82 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 560 (M23.908.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q25 (DEV01) Open U A01 /
Close(d) U A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-83


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 194 (M23.912.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q25 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-84 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 130 (E13.901.R01)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-85


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 132 (E23.903.R02)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay


Q15 (DEV01) Open U A01 K A01
Close(d) U A02 K A02
Q25 (DEV02) Open U A03 K A03
Close(d) U A04 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

U-App-86 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

Bay Type No. 1 (X99.901.R00)

Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation


Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-87


P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
(continued)

U-App-88 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620


© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/Ak6 Version: -611 -620 11/2010
MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/Am6
(AFSV.12.10310 D)
Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621
P632 -308 -407/408 -621
P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621
P634 -308 -407/408 -621

Upgrade Documentation
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices
MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing
features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation
listed below:

References
Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 Technical Manual
P632-304-403/404-610 P63X/EN M/Aa4
P633-304-404/405/406-610 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
P634-304-403/404-610

06.06.2008 P631-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 Upgrade Documentation


-611/620 P63X/EN AD/Ak6
P632-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
-611/620
P633-306/307/308-407/408/409/410/411/412
-611/620
P634-306/307/308-405/406/407/408
-611/620

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-3


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

1 Overview

Version Changes
P631-308-407/408 Hardware No modifications
-620-718
Diagram No modifications
P632-308-407/408
-620-718 Software
P633-308-410/411/412 IEC Bug fixing pertaining to the COMTRADE fault files which a client
-620-718 receives via the IEC 61850 interface:
P634-308-407/408 The correct number of binary channels is now entered in the
-620-718 COMTRADE configuration file (*.cfg). In previous versions when,
because of the function configuration, n*16 binary information was
Release: 18.09.2008
stored then the number of binary channels was given as n*16+1.
Therefore the data stored in the *.cfg and the *.dat files did not match.
The automatically generated data file names are now correct with
fault numbers exceeding 999.
Data file names are issued according to this format:
yyyymmdd_HHMMSS_xxx_rNNNN.eee
With yyyy = year
mm = month
dd = day
HH = hour
MM = minute
SS = second
xxx = millisecond
r = permanent single character
NNNN = fault number
eee = file extension
In previous versions the dot (.) was overwritten for fault numbers
exceeding 999.
Stating of 'Control Modes' in the ICD file has been corrected. The
IEC data model is not affected by this.
LOC Bug fixing:
Using the function where the set password can be made visible on
the LC-display by pressing all four arrow keys simultaneously during
the start up of the device is now also possible with the new local
control panel (with function keys).
PSS Bug fixing:
The time tags for the P S S : P S x a c t i v e spontaneous signals
(according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and
the entry in the operating data memory did not match.
MAIN Bug fixing:
In offline operation mode, measured operating values for phase C
were not calculated correctly with the 60 Hz nominal frequency.
V<> Bug fixing:
After a warm restart the following setting was not active:
V < > : t T r a n s i e n t P S x = Blocked.Because of this, the following
signals were issued when undervoltage conditions were present:
042 023 V < > : t V < e l a p s . T r a n s i e n t
042 025 V<>: tV<< elapsed trans.

Ä-4 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Version Changes
CBF_1 to The release condition for the function has been dissociated from
CBF_4 the drop-out of the internal trip signal. Therefore the sequence will
now only be stopped when a loss of load/undercurrent condition
has occurred or when the CB signals that its contacts are open.
Bug fixing:
The time tags for the C B F _ n : R e a d y spontaneous signals
(according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x)
and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.
P631-308-407/408-621 Hardware No modifications
P632-308-407/408-621 Diagram No modifications
P633-308-410/411/412-621
Software
P634-308-407/408-621
Device The device’s capability to detect its hardware state has been
Release: 08.01.2009 enhanced so that future Ethernet communication and binary
modules can be fitted without having to update the software.
The following addresses are now visible:
002 131 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I
002 132 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I D M
IEC The processing times for the control and monitoring of switchgear units between
the Ethernet communication module and the main CPU have been reduced.
Bug fixing:
The standardized model according to WYE class (e.g. 'phsA' instead of
'adphsA') is now applied with the data model for measured values for
resultant current forming ('virtual end').
The data object LN_CFG has been extended in logical nodes
Dt1NgsPTOC1, Dt2NgsPTOC1, Dt3NgsPTOC1.
Further logical nodes have been added:
LN PloGGIO4 to the P631
LN PloGGIO4, IdcGGIO1, RtdGGIO1 to the P633 and P634
The AlmGGIO logical node has been extended by the following signals:
Alm5: 039 127 T H R M 1 : C T A e r r o r
Alm6: 039 187 T H R M 2 : C T A e r r o r
Alm7: 040 190 M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 o p e n c i r c u i t
Alm8: 040 191 M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t
Alm9: 040 192 M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p .
Al m 1 0 : 036 099 C T S : O p e r a t e d ( u p d a t i n g )
The 'Bl.f.' data objects are now available in all nodes: PTOC, PTOV,
PTUV, PTTR, PTOF, PTUF, RBRF, PVPH. Because of this, the 'Blocking
EXT' condition has been removed from the 'MODE'.
The parameter at address 104 232 I E C : D e a d b a n d V L L
has been renamed to I E C : D e a d b a n d V
Since the corresponding measured values are not provided by the P63x,
the following addresses have been deleted:
104 233 I E C : Dead band VPG
104 235 I E C : Dead band P
104 237 I E C : Dead band Z
104 239 I E C : Dead band ASC
104 060 I E C : Update cycle energy
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-5
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Version Changes
COMM1 Bug fixing with the use of the MODBUS communication protocol:
Faults can now be read out.
MAIN The P633 and P634 now allow disconnection of individual ends by
assigning functions to binary signal inputs.
Bug fixing:
The measured operating values for the positive sequence currents are
now calculated independently of the DTOC/IDMT protection functions.
Display of the following settings has been limited in accordance with the
device function.
Visible only in the P632/P633 are:
021 017 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open
021 020 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed
021 060 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed
021 061 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open

006 001 M A I N : Device selection key


006 002 M A I N : Device OPEN key
006 003 M A I N : Device CLOSE key
006 004 M A I N : Local/Remote key
Visible only in the P633 are:
021 062 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 c l o s e d
021 063 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 o p e n
DIFF The starting condition for the saturation discriminator has been enhanced by
the addition of a further minimum condition for the restraining quantity with
basic filtering. Without this minimum condition, the saturation discriminator
could be incorrectly triggered during the test of a characteristic using virtual
test signals in the absence of a preload current.
REF_1 Blocking of the REF functions while the DIFF protection (functional
to REF_3 enhancement by -611-715) has been triggered can now be
enabled/disabled using setting parameters.
Furthermore the R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T binary signal input
functions are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the
functions.
Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device
setting, its state is also signaled:
R E F _ n : R e a d y (= enabled AND NOT blocked).
REF_1 The function has been enhanced so that further ends can be included into
the protection reach, e.g. in ground differential protection for
autotransformers.
CBF_1 to As an option, the loss of load/undercurrent criterion can now also be used
CBF_4 with the residual current.
The external function startup may now occur either when only the loss of
load/undercurrent criterion is applied or also with the CB contact position
scanning criterion.

Ä-6 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Version Changes
DEV02 to Bug fixing:
DEV10 The menu text in the reference language (English) has been corrected for
the following signals:
218 002 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n
corrected to: 218 002 D E V 0 2 : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d
218 003 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d
corrected to: 218 003 D E V 0 2 : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d
etc. valid for all devices except DEV01.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-7


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

2 Functional Details

2.1 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

Disconnecting ends
With the P633 and P634, individual ends can now be disconnected when specific
protections are applied or for test purposes.
Only one end can be disconnected with the P633. Up to two ends can be disconnected
simultaneously with the P634.
If more ends are simultaneously disconnected from the measurement than is permitted,
the S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s alarm is issued and the device is blocked.
Such a disconnection of an end will result in the setting to zero of all current scan values
for the relevant phase (phase current and residual current).
All functions (e.g. protection functions, limit value monitoring, operating data
measurement, etc.) will continue to operate unaffected, with these values set to zero.
With the differential protection function the formula to calculate the restraining current is
not changed by disconnecting ends, even though only two ends may be left.

Disconnecting ends may only be carried out with binary signal input functions. Starting
via operating parameters (or command sent through a communications interface) is not
possible.
041 019 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T
041 107 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T
041 128 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T
041 129 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T

The binary signal input functions listed above must be continuously present when
disconnecting ends.
To enable the disconnection function, one of the following additional conditions must be met:

… All three phase currents at the relevant end must be below 0.05 Inom:
Disconnection of the end will be permanent as soon as (immediately after) the binary
signal input function has started and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met.
Disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled as soon as (immediately
after) the binary signal input function has ended and this loss of load/undercurrent
condition is met.
The P63x will continue to measure any current flow in the disconnected end in order
to check this loss of load/undercurrent condition, but will not display these measured
values.

… The disconnection function, as an alternative to the loss of load/undercurrent


condition, can be enabled using another binary signal input function (041 148
MAIN: En. disc. end x EXT).
As soon as both binary signal input functions are present, disconnection of the end
will be effective.
As long as the enabling signal is not present at the binary signal input, there is no
status change, i.e. an existing disconnection of an end will remain active
independently of the disconnection request.
As soon as the disconnection request ends with the enable signal still present at the
binary signal input then the disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled.

Ä-8 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Note
As shown in figure 1 both additional conditions are valid independently of each other, i.e.
the following sequence is possible and requires appropriate care in the application:
1) The disconnection of an end is enabled by the additional condition:
MAIN: En. disc. end x EXT.
2) This enabling condition and the disconnection request will end, for instance, with a
fault in the triggering circuit.
3) As soon as the measured current value in the disconnected end drops below the
0.05 Inom threshold then the disconnection will be cancelled.

The effective disconnection of an end is signaled by a state signal.


041 149 M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d
041 158 M A I N : E n d B d i s c o n n e c t e d
041 159 M A I N : E n d C d i s c o n n e c t e d
041 168 M A I N : E n d D d i s c o n n e c t e d

The storage of this state is fail-safe. During the device’s initialization after an auxiliary
power supply failure, the stored state is compared with the current state of the input
functions. If there is a discrepancy (e.g. M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d AND NOT
M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T or vice versa) the alarm (
S F M O N : D i s c . E n d x i n v a l i d ) is issued and the device remains blocked. The
disconnect condition is then continuously monitored and blocking is cancelled only when
the discrepancy has ended. Since the alarm has been stored in the monitoring signal
memory, it must be acknowledged by the user.

Setting or resetting the binary signal input is carried out by an internal function, with an
operate/reset time-delay of approximately 0.5 s in order to prevent time propagation
problems resulting from simultaneously switching on/off the auxiliary power supply and
the signal voltage at the binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-9


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

< 0.05 Inom

IA,a &
IB,a >1

IC,a &

S 1 1 MAIN: End a
disconnected
& R 1 [ 041 149 ]
MAIN: Disconnect
End A EXT
[ 041 019 ]

< 0.05 Inom

IA,b &
IB,b >1

IC,b &

S 1 1 MAIN: End b
disconnected
& R 1 [ 041 158 ]
MAIN: Disconnect
End B EXT
[ 041 107 ]

< 0.05 Inom

IA,c &
IB,c >1

IC,c &

S 1 1 MAIN: End c
disconnected
& R 1 [ 041 159 ]
MAIN: Disconnect
End C EXT
[ 041 128 ]

< 0.05 Inom

IA,d
&
IB,d
>1
IC,d
&

S 1 1 MAIN: End d
disconnected
& R 1 [ 041 168 ]
MAIN: Disconnect
End D EXT
[ 041 148 ]
MAIN: En. disc.
end x EXT
[ 041 148 ]

SFMON: Unsuff.
no. of ends
[ 091 010 ]

P633: >1 End disconnected


P634: >2 Ends disconnected

64Z6211A_EN

U-1 Disconnection logic

Ä-10 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

2.2 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_n)

Blocking ground
differential protection
Blocking of the REF_n functions when the DIFF protection (functional enhancement of
version -611-715) was triggered may now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters.
Furthermore, binary signal input functions (R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T ) are now
available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions.
Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, the
R E F _ n : R e a d y state is also indicated.

REF_1: General
enable USER
[ 019 050 ]

0
1 REF_1: Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
0: No
1: Yes

REF_1: Enable
PSx
[ * ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes

PSU: PS x active
[ * ]

REF_1: Bl.f.DIFF
trigg. PSx
[ * ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes
>1 REF_1: Ready
[ 019 054 ]
DIFF: Meas.system >1
1 trigg.
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF: Meas.system
2 trigg.
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF: Meas.system
3 trigg.
[ 041 126 ]

REF_1: Blocking
EXT
[ 019 051 ]

x PSU: PS x active Parameter REF_1: Enable REF_1: Bl.f.DIFF


PSx trigg. PSx
1 036 090 set 1 072 141 080 006
2 036 091 set 2 073 141 081 006
3 036 092 set 3 074 141 082 006
4 036 093 set 4 075 141 083 006
64Z5300C_EN

U-1 Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-11


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Protection of
autotransformers
Up to now the REF-function could only be applied with the high impedance principle to
protect autotransformers (or, in general, electrically-connected multiple end
configurations) from internal ground faults. Function group REF_1 has now been
enhanced so as to provide a protection function, stabilized by a characteristic, for such
protected objects. A typical example with an autotransformer is displayed in the next
figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-point
current must be considered.

Σ(Ix ,a)= I N,a


I A,a
I B,a
IC,a

Σ(Ix,b)= IN,b
I A,b
I B,b
I C,b

IN,a

U-2 Currents with an autotransformer

For such applications with REF_1, all the other ends (b, c, d – dependent on the type of
device) may now be selected, and end a is still permanently included in the protection
function.
019 120 REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end b = Yes / No
019 121 REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end c = Yes / No
019 122 REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end d = Yes / No

The neutral-point current is still permanently assigned to the measuring input for end a
(T14).

Ä-12 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the device for each
end added.
All currents involved must be referred to a common reference value as this application
entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence system. This common
reference current value is calculated based on the settable reference power and the
nominal voltage for end a. This calculation has not been changed from previous
versions. The amplitude matching factors then result from the ratio of the primary
transformer current values for the relevant end and the common reference current value.

Sref ,prim
Re ference current I ref =
3 ⋅ Vnom ,prim ,a
Inom ,CT , prim ,x
Amplitude matching factor k amp ,x =
I ref
for x = End a, b, c or d

With Sref,prim = 019 031 REF_1: Reference power Sref


Vnom,prim,A = 019 017 MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PS1
Inom,CT,prim,A = 019 020 MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a
Inom,CT,prim,B = 019 021 MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b
Inom,CT,prim,C = 019 022 MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end c
Inom,CT,prim,D = 019 026 MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end d

The reference current and matching factors are displayed at the P63x.

As before, the P63x checks that the reference current and matching factors remain
within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference current can be
looked up in the S&R-103 setting and recording software. The following rule applies to
the matching factors:

… The largest matching factor must be ≤ 16.


… The value for the second largest matching factor must come to ≥ 0.5.

There are no restrictions concerning further possible matching factors.

Should the P63x calculate a common reference current value or matching factors not
satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will
automatically be blocked .

The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then available
for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always
refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal
current or the nominal current of the device.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-13


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase currents
involved and the neutral-point current:

I diff , N = k amp,a ⋅ I N ,a + k amp,b ⋅ I N,b (+...) + k amp, N ⋅ I a , N


{ } { }
= k amp,a ⋅ Σ I A,a , I B,a , I C,a + k amp,b ⋅ Σ I A,b , I B,b , I C,b (+...) + k amp, N ⋅ I a , N

The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode.
If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / sum(IP)', the restraining current is
calculated from the sum of all involved ends:

I R , N = k amp,a ⋅ I N,a + k amp,b ⋅ I N,b (+...)


{ } {
= k amp,a ⋅ Σ I A,a , I B,a , I C,a + k amp,b ⋅ Σ I A,b , I B,b , I C,b (+...) }
If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / IP,max', the formula to calculate
the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end.
But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched
sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.

IR ,N =
1
2
( { }
max I A , I B , I C + kamp ,N ⋅ I a ,N ) ( unchanged )

with I x = k amp,a ⋅ I x ,a + k amp,b ⋅ I x ,b ( +....) , for x = A, B or C

The value pairs (Id,N/IR,N) calculated with the above formula are then compared with the
already identified pick-up characteristics of the ground differential protection function.

Ä-14 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

2.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

Current flow monitoring


The existing line-associated current flow monitoring function has been enhanced by a
residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/disabled.

For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value
derived from the three phase currents may be used.

But this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual current is
available. There is no measuring input for the residual current available with the P631 or
for end d on the P634. In these cases, the internally derived value of the residual
current is always used, regardless of the setting.

As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the current
flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N ) is
issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no monitoring is
carried out and the C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N = No signal is issued continuously.

CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1: Current flow A
IA [ 038 230 ]
IB CBF_1: Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
IC CBF_1: Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF_1: Current flow
>1 Phx
[ 038 233 ]

CBF_1: Eval-
uation IN
[ 022 184 ]

0
1
2
0: Without
1: Calculated
2: Measured C1
c2

+ Σ
+ 1
+ CBF_1: IN<
[ 022 180 ]
IN 2 >1
CBF_1: Current flow N
1 … 2 [ 038 235 ]

CBF_1: IN

64Z1103C_EN

U-3 Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-15


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

Startup
The external startup of the circuit breaker failure function (CBF_n) has been modified.
The CBF function is always started when there is current flowing during a startup. But, if
no current flow is apparent, the CBF function is only started when the external startup
has been selected. For this, the selection table for the
C B F _ n : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x . setting parameter has been extended and now
includes the C B F _ n : S t a r t 3 p E X T signal.

The startup of the circuit breaker failure function by the internal Trip command remains
unchanged.

As of version –620, the release condition for the CBF function has been dissociated from
the startup condition (internal trip command or external startup).
Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has been
detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, from the CB contact
position signal.

Ä-16 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621


P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
(continued)

CBF_1: Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF_1: I< >1 &
[ 022 160 ] &

IA & & & S 1 1

IB R 1

IC

CBF: Current flow N


[ 038 235 ]

MAIN: CB1 open 3p


EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 closed
3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]

CBF_1: Start with


man. trip CBF_1: Startup 3p
[ 022 154 ] >1 & S 1 1 [ 038 211 ]
0 R 1
>1
1
0: No
1: Yes

>1
CBF_1: Fct.
assign. starting
[ 022 202 ]

Gen.trip signal 1
Gen.trip signal 2
Gen.trip signal 3
Gen.trip signal 4
&
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
&
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
&
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 3
[ 036 108 ]
&
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 4
[ 036 109 ]
&
&
MAIN: Trip cmd.
blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03 &
U xnn

Address 038 209 &


CBF_1: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 205 ] 64Z1104D_EN

U-4 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-17


© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/Am6 Version: -621 11/2010
MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/An6
(AFSV.12.10620 D)

Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621


P632 -308 -407/408 -621
P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621
P634 -308 -407/408 -621
⇒ P631 -308 -407/408 -622
⇒ P632 -308 -407/408 -622
⇒ P633 -308 -410/411/412 -622
⇒ P634 -308 -407/408 -622

Upgrade Documentation
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622

In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x,
several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included.
These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:

References
Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 Technical Manual
P632-304-403/404-610 P63x/EN M/Ca4
P633-304-404/405/406-610 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
P634-304-403/404-610
06.06.2008 P631 -306/307/308 Upgrade Documentation
-405/406/407/408 P63x/EN AD/Ak6
-611/620 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
P632-306/307/308
-405/406/407/408
-611/620
P633-306/307/308
-407/408/409/410/411/412
-611/620
P634-306/307/308
-405/406/407/408
-611/620
08.01.2009 P631-308-407/408-621 Upgrade Documentation
P63x/EN AD/Am6
P632-308-407/408-621
(AFSV.12.10310 D)
P633-308-410/411/412-621
P634-308-407/408-621

P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622 3


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622
(continued)

1 Overview

Version Changes
P631-308-407/408-621-720 Hardware No change
P632-308-407/408-621-720
P633-308-410/411/412-621 Diagram No change
-720
P634-308-407/408-621-720
Release: 29.07.2009 Software
DIFF Bug fixing:
It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an
external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had
occurred within the same protection zone.
CBF_x Bug fixing:
The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C) would
sometimes jitter during an open command.
Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would
sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur with the
signals for CBF_1 and CBF_2.
P631-308-407/408-622 Hardware No change
P632-308-407/408-622
P633-308-410/411/412-622 Diagram No change
P634-308-407/408-622
Release: 09.02.2011 Software
PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183)
Note:
Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program
continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now
be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and
Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW
implementation.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may
now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private
and Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS
implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices.
The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of
the MODBUS protocol.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.

4 P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622
(continued)

Version Changes
COMM1, The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161)
COMM2 and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer
be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it
may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default.
Notes:
These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding
this will be truncated.
The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden
unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
IEC Bug fixing:
The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850
modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified
so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices.
MAIN Bug fixing:
Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart.
LED, MAIN, The designation texts of the following data points have been changed,
SFMON, but their functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old
REF_3, designation and the right side shows the new designation.
CBF_4 REF_3: Restrain.curr. REF_3
⇒REF_3: Restrain.curr. REF_3
The English designation texts of the following data points have been
changed, but their functionality remains unchanged. The old designation
is shown on the left and the new designation on the right hand side.
LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot
⇒ LED: Fct.assig. H12 red
SFMON: Unsuff. no. of ends
⇒ SFMON:Unsuff. No. of ends
P634 only:
CBF_4: CB pos. implausibel
⇒ CBF_4: CB pos. implausible
P631, P632, P633, P634:
MAIN: Disconnect End A EXT
⇒ MAIN: Disconnect End a EXT
P632, P633, P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End B EXT
⇒ MAIN: Disconnect End b EXT
P633, P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End C EXT
⇒ MAIN: Disconnect End c EXT
P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End D EXT
⇒ MAIN: Disconnect End d EXT
similar for
MAIN: E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)

P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622 5


Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // 06/2011
P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622
MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/Aq6
(AFSV.12.10630 D)

Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621


P632 -308 -407/408 -621
P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621
P634 -308 -407/408 -621
⇒ P631 -308 -407/408 -630
⇒ P632 -308 -407/408 -630
⇒ P633 -308 -410/411/412 -630
⇒ P634 -308 -407/408 -630

Upgrade Documentation
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630

In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x,
several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included.
These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:

References
Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 Technical Manual
P632-304-403/404-610 P63x/EN M/Ca4
P633-304-404/405/406-610 (AFSV.12.09701 D)
P634-304-403/404-610

06.06.2008 P631 -306/307/308 Upgrade Documentation


-405/406/407/408 P63x/EN AD/Ak6
-611/620 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
P632 -306/307/308
-405/406/407/408
-611/620
P633 -306/307/308
-407/408/409/410/411/412
-611/620
P634 -306/307/308
-405/406/407/408
-611/620
08.01.2009 P631-308-407/408-621 Upgrade Documentation
P632-308-407/408-621 P63x/EN AD/Am6
(AFSV.12.10310 D)
P633-308-410/411/412-621
P634-308-407/408-621

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 3


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

1 Overview

Version Changes
P631-308-407/408-621-720 Hardware No change
P632-308-407/408-621-720
P633-308-410/411/412-621 Diagram No change
-720
P634-308-407/408-621-720
Release: 29.07.2009 Software
DIFF Bug fixing:
It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an
external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had
occurred within the same protection zone.
CBF_x Bug fixing:
□ The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C)
would sometimes jitter during an open command.
□ Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would
sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur
with the signals of CBF_1 and CBF_2.
P631-308-407/408-630 Hardware No change
P632-308-407/408-630
P633-308-410/411/412-630 Diagram No change
P634-308-407/408-630
Release: 09.02.2011 Software
DVICE The new data point (008 233) D V I C E : S W v e r s . C h i n . D H M I D M
is a purely internal version number (for the order option "Chinese
display").
Bug fixing:
Display problems with the Fault Panel are resolved.
IEC Phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communications protocol has been
GOOSE implemented. See section "Communication Interface IEC 61850
(Function Group IEC)" for a detailed description of the numerous function
enhancements carried out.
IEC Bug fixing:
The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850
modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified
so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices.
PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183)
Note:
Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program
continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now
be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and
Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW
implementation.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is
enabled.

4 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Version Changes
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may
now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private
and Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS
implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices.
The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of
the MODBUS protocol.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1 Communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103: When checking during test
(P632 & operations it is now possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact
P633 only) positions (DEV) from the control part (previously only possible from the
protection part).
These new addresses were added:
Oper/CtrlTest/COMM1
(221 105) C O M M 1 : S e l . p o s . d e v . t e s t – Not assigned
– DEV01 to DEV03
(221 106) C O M M 1 : T e s t p o s i t i o n d e v . – don't execute
– execute open
– execute close
– execute intermed.
COMM1, The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161)
COMM2 and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer
be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it
may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default.
Notes:
These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding
this will be truncated.
The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden
unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
MAIN New logic state signal:
ƒ Clock synchronization:
The parameter: M A I N : T i m e s y n c h r o n i z e d (009 109) shows
whether an external clock synchronization had been carried out.
This signal is reset after 10 minutes.
Bug fixing:
Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart.
V/f The setting range for V / f : t a t V / f = 1 . 0 5 P S x has been
extended:
Previously: 1.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s,
Now: 1.0 s to 6000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.
Similarly, the setting range for V / f : R e s e t t i m e P S x has been
extended:
Previously: 0 s to 10000 s in steps of 1 s,
Now: 0 s to 60000 s in steps of 1 s.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 5


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Version Changes
DEVxx Device identifiers can now be edited.
In the "Designat. ext. dev." parameters the 'Device Name User' setting
should be selected. Then the text for the device's name, entered by the
user at each of the "DEV-Name User" parameters, will be used as the
device’s designation. The maximum number of 4 characters was not
changed from the previous permanent default setting.
Parameters (DEV01/DEV02/DEV03):
D E V x x : D E V - N a m e U s e r (218 101, 218 102, 218 103)
LED, MAIN, The designation text of the following data point has been changed, but
SFMON, the functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old
CTS, designation and the right side shows the new designation.
REF_3, CTS: Reset latching EXT
CBF_4 ⇒ CTS: Reset latch. EXT
The designation texts of the following data points have been changed.
The old designation is shown on the left and the new designation on the
right hand side.
LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot

⇒ LED: Fct.assig. H12 red


SFMON: Unsuff. no. of ends
⇒ SFMON: Unsuff. No. of ends
P634 only:
CBF_4: CB pos. implausibel
⇒ CBF_4: CB pos. implausible
P631, P632, P633, P634:
MAIN: Disconnect End A EXT
⇒ MAIN: Disconnect End a EXT
P632, P633, P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End B EXT
⇒MAIN: Disconnect End b EXT
P633, P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End C EXT
⇒MAIN: Disconnect End c EXT
P634 only:
MAIN: Disconnect End D EXT
⇒MAIN: Disconnect End d EXT
similar for
MAIN: E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)

6 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Version Changes
ILOCK As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in
(P632 & the newly implemented phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communication
P633 only) protocol (see above), it is now a requirement that these interlock
conditions are cyclically checked and not, as before, only with the
request for a switching operation. Therefore this new parameter has
been introduced:
(221 104) I L O C K : C y c l e t i n t e r l . c h e c k
The cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s) is set here, after which a
check of the interlock conditions is carried out. As additional processor
capacity must be provided for each of these checks it must be ensured
that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting value.
On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated
without any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value
should not be so short that the P63x system will be under too much
strain. As the P63x CPU load is dependent on the total number of
function groups having been configured it is not possible to suggest a
generally acceptable cycle time value.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 7


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

2 Functional Details

2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

As a further option the device is provided with the interface protocol according to the
Ethernet based communication standard IEC 61850. As of firmware version
P63x -630 the implementation and configuration of the IEC communication interface
are now different from previous design versions.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes
the capability for two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the
same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common basis
for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for
the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device
a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model,
specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data
between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information.
In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description
file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file
can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by
the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process
variables, substations and signal images.
The following documentation providing the description of the IEC 61850 data model
used with this unit is available:
… An XML-based IDC file in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of data, properties and services, available from the unit, that are
to be imported into the configuration tool "IED Configurator” or into a system
configurator.
… A PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
… PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
… MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
… ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of
parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the
device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.

8 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two
interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the
parameter [IC ]: M ed ia .
Note: Setting parameters from the IEC function group and identified by "[IC ]:..."
provide information only. They are set with the "IED Configurator", but they
cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating
program.

There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST connector
and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector
for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and
100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the MiCOM S1 operating program (function group COMM2).
Notes: The unit may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.

Configuration and
enabling
The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the parameter
I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet
communication module is fitted to the device. After having included the parameter
I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C in the configuration the parameter
I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R and the parameters for internal clock tracking are
visible and freely configurable.

The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting


IEC: General enable USER.

The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related function
groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the unit. The unit features
two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other
memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED
Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the
IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the unit by
downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by
executing the command I E C : S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k . This command may also
be issued from the IED Configurator.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 9


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

U-1 Configuration according to IEC 61850-6

10 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!

IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
Parameter download switch

IED Ethernet module


Configurator Parameter upload IEC 61850 IEC 61850
parameter parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2

Bank switching to enable the


device parameters

New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002A_EN

U-2 Saving configuration parameters

Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that unit which provides information to other units.
A client may log on to this server in order to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In its function as server the unit can supply up to 16 clients, linked into the network,
with spontaneous or cyclic information.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 11


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the unit functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization
occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all units in the network,
and in the second operating mode the unit requests a unit-specific time signal during a
settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is reverted to only if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1/IEC", synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Generating datasets,
reporting
The specific project related feature of the unit’s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority transmission
methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as to be transmitted
as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects. The selection of data
objects and the resulting length of the dataset are determined by the application;
merely the maximum size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE (see next section)
is limited to 1500 bytes. Data objects provided by the unit are available for selection
with a structure as specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece
of information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the unit’s state; the
other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED
Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The knowledge of
dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals.
Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects
included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see following section)
datasets are used mainly for reporting. The unit provides up to sixteen unbuffered
reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of clients logged-on.
Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (urcbA to
urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH). Whereas with
unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a communications
failure, the buffered report control blocks support a buffered transmission which is
required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A pre-defined dataset may be
assigned to each report which will then determine which data object will be transmitted
with the relevant report. Assigning datasets is not limited; the same dataset may be
referenced in various reports or even in GOOSEs.
The unit can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports, but one report is always allocated exclusively to only one client.
The client is then able to activate the wanted report for himself and to set the
transmission behavior to his requirements. The system concept with intended clients
must be taken into account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the unit.

12 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Transmitting modeled
signals not provided by
the IEC 61850 data
model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number
of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be
transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to communications) is
made by setting I E C : S i g G G I O 1 s e l e c t i o n . The data object indexes defined
for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m out of n’ selection for the state
signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included
in the datasets just as the other data objects.
Single commands
Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command) are
configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the unit can be carried
out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the unit. But only one command
at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control with normal security is
provided for single commands.
Control and monitoring of
switchgear units
Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible with
the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear devices can be carried out from all clients that have previously
logged-on to the unit. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further
control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are
rejected. The following operating modes [ I C ] : c t l M o d e l are available to control
external devices by clients and they can be individually set for each switchgear device:
… Status only
… Direct control with enhanced security
… SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected
by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the
switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are
rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by the client the unit resets
this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]: sbo T ime ou t (default: 2 minutes)
has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time
is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units
among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details see description of
function group GOOSE.
The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the reports.
Fault transmission
Including fault transmission for IEC 61850 in the configuration is possible only with the
IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". COMTRADE fault files in
the unit are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files. Fault
transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 13


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

High priority transmission


of information
Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level
the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at Ethernet level.
Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received by all participants in
the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or client function. They are
deployed in instances where high-speed transmission of information is wanted
between two or more devices. Applications, for example, are reverse interlocking,
transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The IEC 61850 standard provides two modes for high priority transmission of
information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE) is
used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is
compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available
in the data model, such as binary information, integer values, two-pole contact position
signals or analog measured values. The unit supports receipt and evaluation of
GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact position signals from
external devices.
Communication with the
MiCOM S1 operating
program via the Ethernet
interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 operating program via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is supported only by the associated MiCOM S1
operating program (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is
accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client
communication. Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1
operating program such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored
data.

14 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Function group IEC presents the following parameters, measured values and signals:

Parameters listed in italic letters provide information only. They are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool "IED Configurator", but they cannot be
modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.

Configuration parameters in IEC: Function group IEC 056 059

the operating program


Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General enable USER 104 000

Enabling and disabling function group IEC.


IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k 104 043

This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
IEC: Active Config. Name 104 045

Name of the configuration bank currently valid.


Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Active Config. Vers. 104 046

Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.


Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Inact. Config. Name 104 047

Name of the inactive configuration bank.


Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Inact. Config. Vers. 104 048

Version number of the inactive configuration bank.


Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: IED name 104 057

Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 15


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

IEC: IP address 104 001

IP address of the unit set for the server function in the system.
Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was
used to set the IP address. Now it is only an information parameter
('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator"
with Communications: IP Address.
IEC: Subnet mask 104 005

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was
used to set the sub-network. Now it is only an information parameter
('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator"
with Communications: SubNet Mask.
IEC: Gateway address 104 011

This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was
used to set the network gateway. Now it is only an information parameter
('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator"
with Communications: Gateway Address.
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 104 202

IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.


IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 104 202

IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization


IEC: SigGGIO1 selection 104 064

Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol


IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
IEC: Diff. local time 104 206

Time difference between UTC and local time at the unit’s substation.
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207

Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.


IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time 104 219

This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time


is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 220

IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 221

IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m 104 222

These three parameters define the date for switching from standard time
over to daylight saving time. By combining the three parameters
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (values "first", "second", "third", "fourth",
"last"), I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (seven weekdays) and
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (month) a setting, for example, such as
"on the last Sunday in March" can be carried out.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + 104 223

Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched
to standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from
2:00 AM to 3:00 AM the parameter I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is set
to 120 (minutes).

16 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 225

IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 226

IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 227

IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ 104 228

These parameters define the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. Settings are made similar to the
changeover to daylight saving time.

Parameter, unit identification DVICE: MAC address module A 104 061

MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module.


This address is set during manufacture and can only be read.

Function parameters COUNT: Iec61850 pulsQty 221 096

associated with IEC 61850,


general function
Setting the scaling factor for the count value’s transmission via IEC 61850.
According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = updated value * pulsQty.

Operation, cyclic values, IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180

logic state signals


Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address
is missing or there is an implausible parameter setting.
IEC: Control reservation 221 082

Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device


("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").

Configuration parameters in IED Details: SCL File ID


the IED Configurator
Identification of the .mcl configuration file. The preset value may be
changed on demand by, for example, entering a bay name.
IED Details: SCL File Version
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, identifying
the revision states during engineering.
IED Details: Name
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.

Further specific values listed in the column "Template Details" only provide
information. They are preset and cannot be modified.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 17


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Communications: Connected Sub-Network


Optional name available to identify the Ethernet.
Communications: Access Point
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Communications: IP Address
Explicitly assigned IP address of the unit for the server function in the
system.
Communications: SubNet Mask
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Communications: Gateway Address
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Communications: Media
Network hardware provided as fiber optics or twisted pair copper wires.
Communications: TCP Keepalive
Communication monitoring at TCP level; preset.
Communications: Database Lock Timeout
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced; preset.
SNTP: Poll Rate (seconds)
Polling interval for clock synchronization; preset.
SNTP: Accepted Stratum level
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,
cannot be modified.
SNTP: IP Address
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
SNTP: virtual key "Use Anycast"
Appointing any server in the local network to provide clock synchronization.

Further specific values listed in the column "External server parameters"


may be accepted when imported from an XML configuration file.

Dataset Definitions: Name


Explicitly assigned name for the dataset.
Dataset Definitions: Location
Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory.
Dataset Definitions: Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset
Dataset Definitions: Display “GOOSE Capacity”
Checking the length of a dataset for less than 1500 bytes to permit
transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is irrelevant when the
dataset is only used in reports.

18 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Report Control Blocks: Report Type


Report type
… Unbuffered updating
… Buffered saving
Report Control Blocks: Report ID
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Report Control Blocks: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Report Control Blocks: Configuration Revision
Revision status of the configuration.
Controls: ctlModel
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:
… Status only
manually operated switching device
… Direct control with enhanced security
direct command issue with extended monitoring of command effecting
… SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
switching device selection procedure with extended monitoring of
command effecting
Controls: sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without having issued a command.
Controls: Uniqueness of Control: Multicast MAC Address
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Application ID (hex)
ID-number of the GOOSE.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Configuration Revision
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 19


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Default Input Value


Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
… False Default: not set
… True Default: set
… Last Known Value Default: retain last value received
… Double Point: Intermediate (00) Default: switching device in
intermediate position
… Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open
… Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed
… Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in
intermediate position

Measurements: Unit multiplier


Multiplication factor; not supported.
Measurements: Scaled measurement range Min
Lower measuring range limit value; not supported.
Measurements: Scaled measurement range Max
Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Measurements: Deadband
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to
have the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value
last sent the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest
display value must exceed the smallest display value.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.measCyc: Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two
dead band evaluations.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.enCyc: Value
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time
interval in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.comtrade: Value
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary
files.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.distExtr: Value
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.

Further specific values listed in the column "Data type” only provide
information. They are preset and cannot be modified.

20 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

2.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual units (IEDs) in a local
network, the unit provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard
IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of information for
reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking,
enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the unit is connected.
Configuration and
enabling
Function group GOOSE can be configured using the parameter
G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is visible only if the
optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. Once the GOOSE is
configured, all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and
settable.

Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or
with the operating program.

The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting


GOOSE: General enable USER.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 21


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

» Device A » Device B

IEC 61850 S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2 S1 Studio

Mapping GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32 GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32

System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32

IED Configurator IED Configurator System/GosGGIO1


System/LLN0/Datasetx Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal

IED Configurator
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
MCL

IED Configurator System/DevGosGGIO3

Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal

Fixed assignment

S1 Studio

Ext.Dev 1 … 32

19Z7003A_EN

U-3 GOOSE configuration

22 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Sending GOOSE
The unit can send up to eight different GOOSE messages that are managed in eight
GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the
respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be sent by
GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED Configurator to
check this limit.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is kept
within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number
of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be
transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting. Selection of binary state
signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting
G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The data object indexes defined
for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the GOOSE outputs. The
indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then be included in the
datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value changes
which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then the complete
GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods.
The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter
[ I C ] : M i n i m u m C y c l e T i m e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result
from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter
[ I C ] : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the
maximum cycle time has elapsed [IC ]: M a ximu m C yc le Ti me, then GOOSE will
be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics such as
[IC]: Multicas t MAC Ad dress , [IC]: Application ID (hex),
[IC ]: VL AN Id en ti fi er (h e x) , [IC ]: VL AN Pr iori ty and
[IC ]: GO O SE Ide n ti fi er must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are
[IC ]: Da tase t R e fer ence and [IC ]: Co n fi gur ati on R e vis io n .
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 23


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact position
signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each state signal or
contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message is to be selected,
which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[IC]: Multicas t MAC Ad dress , [IC]: Application ID (hex),
[IC]: Source Path, [IC]: GOOSE Id entifie r and [ I C ] : D a ta S e t R e fer e n c e .
With the further setting of [IC ]: Da ta O bj Inde x / T ype , which corresponds to the
GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending unit, the required
information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The identification features
"VLAN identifier" and [ I C ] : C o n f i g u r a t i o n R e v i s i o n that are also included in
the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from unit or
project planning documentation of the sending unit or from a configuration file which is
conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will support the import of .IID, .SCD and
.MCL files when the "browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and
acceptance of parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a
simplified and very reliable data input.
Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then this
can be evaluated. When activating [I C ] : Q u a l i t y O b j I n d e x, the distance of the
quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well as the quality
criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the bits
([IC ]: In va lid i ty Q ua li ty b i ts , see displayed bar with bit state) is received as a set
bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and are accepted
from there during an import action.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition.
If the duration of validity has elapsed without this GOOSE having been received again
(e.g. because of a fault in communications), the received signals will automatically be
set to their respective default values [ I C ] : D e f a u l t I n p u t V a l u e . Which of the
possible state values will set the desired security grade depends on the relevant
application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state signals
received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n
= 1 to 32) is based on the selection table of the binary inputs, identical to that of the
opto-coupler inputs. Contact position signals received from external devices
(LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations of the
function group ILOCK, which are available to design a decentralized substation
interlock.
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input to an
external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are deleted.

24 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Uniqueness of control
within a system
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time
is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units
among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The unit sets the status information
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control command.
This information - stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by GOOSE and is
therefore available to all other units as an interlocking condition. The state information
is reset and accordingly signaled after termination of the command sequence.
The unit is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further units. With the
IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal are
configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the interlocking
equations is not necessary as their consideration within command checking is
automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured. During a
signaling receipt phase command execution will be rejected.

U-4 Uniqueness of Control

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 25


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

The function group GOOSE presents the following parameters, measured values and
signals:

Configuration parameters in GOOSE: Function group GOOSE 056 068

the operating program


Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this
function group have been activated by setting the parameter
IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k .
GOOSE: General enable USER 106 001

Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.


GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011

GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 013

GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 015

GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 017

GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 019

GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 021

GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 023

GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 025

GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 027

GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 029

GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 031

GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 033

GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 035

GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 037

GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 039

GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 041

GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 043

GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 045

GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 047

GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 049

GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 051

GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 053

GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 055

GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 057

GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 059

GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 061

GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 063

GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 065

GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 067

GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 069

GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 071

GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. 106 073

Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE


outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to
GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 in the datasets.

26 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006

GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 016

GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 026

GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 036

GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 046

GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 056

GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 066

GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 076

GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 086

GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 096

GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 106

GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 116

GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 126

GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 136

GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 146

GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 107 156

GOOSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 107 157

GOOSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 107 158

GOOSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 107 159

GOOSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 107 160

GOOSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 107 161

GOOSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 107 162

GOOSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 107 163

GOOSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 107 164

GOOSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 107 165

GOOSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 107 166

GOOSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 107 167

GOOSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 107 168

GOOSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 107 169

GOOSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 107 170

GOOSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 107 171

GOOSE: Input 32 fct.assig. 107 172

Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs


(GosGGIO1\Pos1.stVal to GosGGIO1\Pos32.stVal) to a binary logical state
signal on the unit so that they can be processed further by the protection,
control or logic functions. Signals configured here contain the received and
pre-processed state of data attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 27


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Physical state signals GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010

GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012

GOOSE: Output 3 state 106 014

GOOSE: Output 4 state 106 016

GOOSE: Output 5 state 106 018

GOOSE: Output 6 state 106 020

GOOSE: Output 7 state 106 022

GOOSE: Output 8 state 106 024

GOOSE: Output 9 state 106 026

GOOSE: Output 10 state 106 028

GOOSE: Output 11 state 106 030

GOOSE: Output 12 state 106 032

GOOSE: Output 13 state 106 034

GOOSE: Output 14 state 106 036

GOOSE: Output 15 state 106 038

GOOSE: Output 16 state 106 040

GOOSE: Output 17 state 106 042

GOOSE: Output 18 state 106 044

GOOSE: Output 19 state 106 046

GOOSE: Output 20 state 106 048

GOOSE: Output 21 state 106 050

GOOSE: Output 22 state 106 052

GOOSE: Output 23 state 106 054

GOOSE: Output 24 state 106 056

GOOSE: Output 25 state 106 058

GOOSE: Output 26 state 106 060

GOOSE: Output 27 state 106 062

GOOSE: Output 28 state 106 064

GOOSE: Output 29 state 106 066

GOOSE: Output 30 state 106 068

GOOSE: Output 31 state 106 070

GOOSE: Output 32 state 106 072

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

28 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200

GOOSE: Input 2 state 106 201

GOOSE: Input 3 state 106 202

GOOSE: Input 4 state 106 203

GOOSE: Input 5 state 106 204

GOOSE: Input 6 state 106 205

GOOSE: Input 7 state 106 206

GOOSE: Input 8 state 106 207

GOOSE: Input 9 state 106 208

GOOSE: Input 10 state 106 209

GOOSE: Input 11 state 106 210

GOOSE: Input 12 state 106 211

GOOSE: Input 13 state 106 212

GOOSE: Input 14 state 106 213

GOOSE: Input 15 state 106 214

GOOSE: Input 16 state 106 215

GOOSE: Input 17 state 106 216

GOOSE: Input 18 state 106 217

GOOSE: Input 19 state 106 218

GOOSE: Input 20 state 106 219

GOOSE: Input 21 state 106 220

GOOSE: Input 22 state 106 221

GOOSE: Input 23 state 106 222

GOOSE: Input 24 state 106 223

GOOSE: Input 25 state 106 224

GOOSE: Input 26 state 106 225

GOOSE: Input 27 state 106 226

GOOSE: Input 28 state 106 227

GOOSE: Input 29 state 106 228

GOOSE: Input 30 state 106 229

GOOSE: Input 31 state 106 230

GOOSE: Input 32 state 106 231

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 29


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Logic state signals GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000

State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an


external device.
(Addresses 109 000,109 005…109 175 for the external devices
DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001

Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 001,109 006…109 176 for the external devices
DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002

Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 002,109 007…109 177 for the external devices
DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003

Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,


representing the state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 003,109 008…109 178 for the external devices
DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: IED01 link faulty 107 180

Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not


available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently
of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the
reception of the next state signal.
(Addresses 107 180…107 215 for IED01 to IED32.)
GOOSE: ExtDev01 link faulty 107 216

Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty


or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a
validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval
before the reception of the next state signal.
(Addresses 107 216…107 247 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250

Display that appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured


GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending
device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be
carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the
time interval before the reception of the next state signal.

30 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

Configuration parameters in GOOSE Publishing: Multicast MAC Address


the IED Configurator
Virtual MAC address that the sending unit provides as the destination;
preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Application ID (hex)
Explicitly assigned ID number of the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Identifier (hex)
ID number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Priority
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Minimum Cycle Time
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Maximum Cycle Time
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time
period; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Increment
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
GOOSE Publishing: GOOSE Identifier
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
GOOSE Publishing: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: Configuration Revision
Revision status of the configuration.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 31


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

GOOSE Subscribing: Multicast MAC Address


Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
GOOSE Subscribing: Application ID (hex)
ID-number of the GOOSE.
GOOSE Subscribing: Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Subscribing: GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Subscribing: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Subscribing: Configuration Revision
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
GOOSE Subscribing: Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
GOOSE Subscribing: Data Type
Structure of the data object; possible settings:
… Unknown Unknown
… Boolean Boolean
… Int8 Integer, 8 bits (binary digits)
… Int16 Integer, 16 bits (binary digits)
… Int32 Integer, 32 bits (binary digits)
… UInt8 Positive integer, 8 bits (binary digits)
… UInt16 Positive integer, 16 bits (binary digits)
… UInt32 Positive integer, 32 bits (binary digits)
… Float Floating-point number
… BStr2 Binary state, 2 bits
… SPS Single-pole signal
… DPS Two-pole signal
GOOSE Subscribing: Quality Obj Index
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality
of the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.

32 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630


P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
(continued)

GOOSE Subscribing: Invalidity Quality bits


Quality criterion, which is to be tested.
… Invalid / Questionable Invalid / questionable
… Source Information source is faulty
… Relay test Sending unit is set to test mode
… OperatorBlocked Blocked by operator
and
… Overflow Measured value has exceeded its capacity
… OutofRange Measured value has exceeded its range
… BadReference Referenced value is faulty
… Oscillatory Value is volatile
… Failure Faulty
… OldData Information is out-of-date
… Inconsistent Information is unreliable
… Inaccurate Information is inaccurate
GOOSE Subscribing: Evaluation Expression
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set
integer value; the parameter is not supported in the unit.
… Equal to Compared to: equal
… Not equal to Compared to: unequal
… Greater than Compared to: greater
… Less than Compared to: less
… Pass through Do not compare
GOOSE Subscribing: Default Input Value
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed
… False Default: not set
… True Default: set
… Last Known Value Default: retain last value received
… Double Point: intermediate (00) Default: switching device in
intermediate position
… Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open
… Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed
… Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in
intermediate position

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 33


34 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 06/2011
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN M/Aq6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621 -622 -630, Volume 2 06/2011

You might also like